B-64014en 04

FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC
Series Series Series Series
30+-MODEL A/B 31+-MODEL A/B 32+-MODEL A/B 35+-MODEL B
Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-64014EN/04
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual contain software controlled based on Japans Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law. For this reason, the export of these products is subject to an export license based on that law. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible. This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not followed by or in the main body.
B-64014EN/04
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units, to ensure safe operation of machines fitted with FANUC CNC units. Read this section carefully before attempting to use any function described in this manual. Users should also read the relevant descriptions in the Users Manual of the CNC to become fully familiar with the functions to be used. Contents DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed. CAUTION Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed. NOTE The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING 1 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-64014EN/04
WARNING 2 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the programmed value, compensation value, current position, and external signal settings. Also, never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function, or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is no need to change them. When, however, there is no alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. CAUTION 1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit. Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly. 2 The operator's manual for Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server describes all the basic functions of the CNC, including the optional functions. The selected optional functions vary with the machine. Some functions described in this manual may not, therefore, be supported by your machine. Check the machine specifications before using Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server.
s-2
B-64014EN/04
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION 3 Some machine operations and screen functions are implemented by the machine tool builder. For an explanation of their usage and related notes, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. For example: On some machines, executing a tool function causes the tool change unit to operate. When executing a tool function on such a machine, stand well clear of the tool change unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury to the operator. Many auxiliary functions trigger physical operations, such as rotation of the spindle. Before attempting to use an auxiliary function, therefore, ensure that you are fully aware of the operation to be triggered by that function. NOTE Command programs, parameters, and variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC. Generally, the contents of memory are not lost by a power on/off operation. However, the contents of memory may be erased by mistake, or important data in nonvolatile memory may have to be erased upon recovering from a failure. To enable the restoration of data as soon as possible if such a situation arises, always make a backup of the data in advance.
s-3
B-64014EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-1
I. GENERAL 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 3

1.1 1.2 1.3 ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................... 3 APPLICABLE MODELS................................................................................. 3 RELATED MANUALS.................................................................................... 4
II. SPECIFICATION 1 PREFACE................................................................................................ 7

1.1 DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED Ethernet AND OPTIONAL BOARD .............................................................................. 7 HARDWARE OPTIONS................................................................................. 9 SOFTWARE OPTIONS ................................................................................. 9 RELATED NC PARAMETERS ...................................................................... 9 SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE OPTIONS .................................................................................................... 10 SCREEN LAYOUT ...................................................................................... 12 DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT ........................................................ 13
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 File Names of CNC File Management ...................................................................14 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server................................14 Text Files and Binary Files ....................................................................................15
ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ......................................... 9

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ............................................................... 13

3.1
3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
DATA SERVER MODES ............................................................................. 15 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE............................................................. 17 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER ...................................................... 20 NC PROGRAM FORMAT............................................................................ 20 LIST FILE FORMAT .................................................................................... 22 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION ..................................................... 24
4 5 6 7 8
FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS........................................................... 25 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 26 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS................................... 27 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION ............................................ 28 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ....................................................... 30
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-64014EN/04
III. SETTING 1 2 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION ................................... 33

1.1 2.1 2.2 2.3 BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS............... 33 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN ............................. 36 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 43 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ..................... 47 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN ......................... 48 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 50 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS.................. 51 SETTING OF DNS....................................................................................... 52 SETTING OF DHCP .................................................................................... 53 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 55 EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP.......................................................... 55
4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server ...................................................55 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data Server ...............56 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function ..................................57
SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS....................................... 36
SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS .................................. 48

3.1 3.2 3.3
SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION................................................ 52

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .......... 60

5.1 5.2 5.3 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN. 60 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 64 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC ......................................................................................... 65
5.3.1 5.3.2 Signals ....................................................................................................................65 Signal Timing Charts..............................................................................................67
5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2 5.3.2.3 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted................................... 67 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected.................................... 68 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated .................................... 68
5.4
EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS................................................................................................ 69
SETTING THE UNSOLICITED

6.1
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3
MESSAGING FUNCTION................. 70
SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION .......................... 70

Selection of Mode ..................................................................................................73 Setting Method by CNC Screen .............................................................................74 Setting Method by Personal Computer...................................................................78 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice method) ...................79 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method) ..................................81 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method)................................82
6.2
EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION..................... 78

6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3
6.3
RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 84 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ..................................... 86 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 89
c-2
SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION............................... 86

7.1 7.2
B-64014EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING 91
IV. OPERATION 1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS................................. 95

1.1 1.2 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN...................... 95 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN ............................ 96
1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................100 File Transfer Operation ........................................................................................106 Preparations for File Operation and Editing.........................................................107 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................110 File Transfer Operation ........................................................................................113 Preparations for File Operation ............................................................................114
1.3
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN ............... 108
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3
1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL........................................................ 115 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 116 NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 116 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 117 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 118 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SCREEN ............... 119
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 Selecting an Inquiry Destination ..........................................................................120 Starting Diagnosis ................................................................................................120
2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 Diagnosis status ............................................................................................... 120 Error numbers and error messages................................................................... 121
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .. 119

2.1
Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis...........................................................................122
OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION....................... 123

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN.................... 124 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN.............. 125
3.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................126
NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 129 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 129
V. CONNECTION 1 SETTING ............................................................................................. 133

1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 133
1.1.1 1.1.2 Specifications .......................................................................................................133 Installation ............................................................................................................133
1.1.2.1 1.1.2.2 1.1.2.3 1.1.2.4 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit ...................................................... 133 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ............................................................. 134 Total connection diagram ................................................................................ 135 Installing a memory card ................................................................................. 135
1.2
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ............................................................................. 137

1.2.1 1.2.2 Specifications .......................................................................................................137 Installation ............................................................................................................138
1.2.2.1 1.2.2.2 1.2.2.3 1.2.2.4 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit ...................................................... 138 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ............................................................. 139 Total connection diagram ................................................................................ 140 Installing a memory card ................................................................................. 140 c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-64014EN/04
CABLE CONNECTION ....................................................................... 142

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 CONNECTING TO Ethernet ...................................................................... 142 LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE ....................................................... 144 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS ............................................... 144 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION ................................................ 145
2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 Cable Connection .................................................................................................145 Cable Materials.....................................................................................................145 Connector Specification .......................................................................................147 Separating Signal Lines........................................................................................148 Clamping and Shielding Cables ...........................................................................148 Grounding the Network........................................................................................150
2.5
ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES.......................................... 148

2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3
2.6
CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................................................... 152
VI. MAINTENANCE 1 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.................................. 157

1.1 1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 157
1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 Component Layout ...............................................................................................157 LED Indications and Meanings ............................................................................158 Component Layout ...............................................................................................160 LED Indications and Meanings ............................................................................161
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ............................................................................. 160
SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION................................... 164

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 Ethernet LOG ............................................................................................ 164 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION.......................................... 169 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION........................................... 171 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION.................................. 172 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 173 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............................................... 176 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION........................... 177
APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 181

A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB.......................................... 181 CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK ....................................... 181 CHECKING SETTINGS............................................................................. 182 CHECKING COMMUNICATION................................................................ 182 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ..................................................... 185 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ..................................................... 196 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 216
c-4
EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP ................................................. 185

B.1 B.2 B.3
B-64014EN/04
TABLE OF CONTENTS SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 233 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server. 255 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server ... 261 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND.............................................. 266 OPERATION USING THE Explorer........................................................... 268
D.2.1 D.2.2 Displaying the File List ........................................................................................268 File Operation and File Transfer ..........................................................................281
B.4
EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP ........................................... 254

C.1 C.2
FTP CLIENT OPERATION.................................................................. 266

D.1 D.2 D.3
SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack 2) / Vista ........ 283
c-5
I. GENERAL
B-64014EN/04
GENERAL
1.GENERAL
1
1.1
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION
This part explains the organization of this manual.
This manual consists of the following parts: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the precautions to be observed when reading this manual. I. GENERAL This part describes the chapter organization, applicable models, and related manuals. II. SPECIFICATION This part describes the specifications of the functions that operate on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. III. SETTING This part describes the method of setting. IV. OPERATION This part describes the method of operating the Data Server functions, machine remote diagnosis functions, and FTP file transfer function. V. CONNECTION This part describes the method of connection and provides notes. VI. MAINTENANCE This part provides an Ethernet board drawing number and describes the meanings of LED indications. APPENDIX These appendixes describe additional information such as that related to troubleshooting, the operation of the FTP client, and how to set up the FTP server.
1.2
APPLICABLE MODELS
This Operator's Manual covers the following models. The abbreviations in the following table are sometimes used in text descriptions.
Model name FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5 FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B5 FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B FANUC Series 35i-MODEL B Series 30i -A Series 31i -A Series 32i -A Series 30i -B Series 31i -B Series 32i -B Series 35i -B Series 30i/31i/32i -B Series 35i -B Series 30i/31i/32i /35i -B Series 30i/31i/32i -A Series 30i/31i/32i -A/B or Series 30i/31i/32i Abbreviation
-3-
1.GENERAL
GENERAL
B-64014EN/04
1.3
RELATED MANUALS
The table below lists manuals related to this manual. Refer to these manuals when you use this manual. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Manual name Related to Series 30i/31i/32i-A DESCRIPTIONS CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) OPERATORS MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe System) OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center System) MAINTENANCE MANUAL PARAMETER MANUAL Related to Series 30i/31i/32i-B DESCRIPTIONS CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) OPERATORS MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe System) OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center System) MAINTENANCE MANUAL PARAMETER MANUAL Related to Series 35i-B DESCRIPTIONS CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) OPERATORS MANUAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL PARAMETER MANUAL PMC FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL Network PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL Machine Remote Diagnosis Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATORS MANUAL Specification number B-63942EN B-63943EN B-63943EN-1 B-63944EN B-63944EN-1 B-63944EN-2 B-63945EN B-65950EN B-64482EN B-64483EN B-64483EN-1 B-64484EN B-64484EN-1 B-64484EN-2 B-64485EN B-64490EN B-64522EN B-64523EN B-64523EN-1 B-64524EN B-64525EN B-64530EN B-63983EN B-64513EN B-63993EN B-64014EN B-64043EN B-64163EN B-64463EN B-63734EN
-4-
II. SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
1.PREFACE
PREFACE
In this manual, a board that has an ATA Flash card or a Compact Flash Card (collectively called a memory card hereinafter) mounted to enable the use of the Data Server functions is referred to as a "Fast Data Server" (or simply as a "Data Server"). On the other hand, a board that does not have a memory card mounted is referred to as a "Fast Ethernet".
Board name Usable function Data Server functions FOCAS2/Ethernet functions CNC screen display functions Machine remote diagnosis functions Unsolicited messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet) FOCAS2/Ethernet functions CNC screen display functions Machine remote diagnosis functions Unsolicited messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet) FTP file transfer function
Fast Data Server (or simply referred to as "Data Server")
Fast Ethernet
NOTE 1 To use the Data Server functions, the Data Server function option is required. To use the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, CNC screen display functions, machine remote diagnosis functions, unsolicited messaging function, and FTP file transfer function, the Ethernet function option is required. To use the CNC screen display functions, the CNC screen display function option is additionally required. 2 The LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B has a Fast Ethernet circuit (Multi-function Ethernet) mounted on its main board. The circuit can be used as hardware for Fast Ethernet. For details, see Section 2.1, HARDWARE OPTIONS below. 3 The Data Server functions cannot be used with the Series 35i-B.
1.1
DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED Ethernet AND OPTIONAL BOARD
There are the following differences in Ethernet function between the embedded Ethernet and optional board.
Embedded Ethernet FOCAS2/Ethernet functions DNC operation FTP file transfer function Data Server functions Machine remote diagnosis functions Unsolicited messaging function DNS/DHCP client functions Ethernet display function Note 1 Possible Impossible Possible Impossible Impossible Possible Possible Possible Optional board Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Impossible
Note 2 Note 3
-7-
1.PREFACE
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
NOTE 1 The number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients that can be connected concurrently with the embedded Ethernet is smaller than that with the optional board.
Embedded Ethernet Number of clients that can be connected concurrently Number of PCs that can be connected concurrently Up to 5 1 (recommended) Optional board Up to 20 Up to 20
2 The Data Server functions cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet in the Series 30i/31i/32i-B. For details of Multi-function Ethernet, see Section 2.1, HARDWARE OPTIONS below. 3 To use the unsolicited messaging function on the embedded Ethernet in the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the Enhanced Embedded Ethernet function (R952) option is required. 4 Communication using embedded Ethernet is processed by the CPU in the CNC, which means that the CNC operation status may affect the communication performance of the embedded Ethernet and communication using embedded Ethernet may also affect CNC processing. The embedded Ethernet function operates with priority lower than that given to automatic or manual operation performed for each axis. Consequently, the communication rate may be slower during automatic operation or operation with many controlled axes. Meanwhile, the embedded Ethernet function operates with priority higher than that given to the CNC screen display processing, C Language Executor (other than high-level tasks), and other processing. Consequently, communication using embedded Ethernet may reduce the performance of the processing. 5 Carefully connect embedded Ethernet to an intracompany network handling much broadcast data because broadcast data processing takes time, which may affect the performance of the CNC screen display processing and others.
-8-
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
2.ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
2
2.1
ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
The hardware of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B is different from one of Series 30i/31i/32i-A. In this section, the difference of the specification is described.
HARDWARE OPTIONS
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following hardware is prepared for Fast Ethernet.

Kind of hardware Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet board Description Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B (Connector name: CD38B) Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R)
The above hardware can be used as hardware for the FL-net according to the setting of the NC parameters (No.970-972). The information when the hardware is used as hardware for Fast Ethernet is described in this manual. Refer to FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL (B-64163EN) regarding the FL-net function.
2.2
SOFTWARE OPTIONS
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following software functions can be used by the hardware options shown in section 2.1.
Function name Ethernet function Data Server function FL-net function FL-net PORT2 function Drawing A02B-xxxx-S707 A02B-xxxx-S737 A02B-xxxx-J692 A02B-xxxx-R964 Description Ethernet function (ex. FOCAS2/Ethernet) can be used. Data Server function can be used. (NOTE1) FL-net function can be used. Two FL-net functions can be used simultaneously.
NOTE 1 The Data Server function cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet. The Data Server function cannot be used on the Series 35i-B. 2 In the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the special software and software options are necessary to use the FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function. But, in the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, it is possible to use FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function by only Ethernet function and FL-net function. Please refer to 2.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS about the setting for FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function.
2.3
0970 0971 0972
RELATED NC PARAMETERS
Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function Select hardware that operates first FL-net function Select hardware that operates second FL-net function
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] -1 to 6 Hardware that operates each function is selected. Please refer to the next section, too.
-9-
2. ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

Value -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
Hardware Not used Unsetting (NOTE1) Multi-function Ethernet (NOTE2) (reserved) Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 1 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 2 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 4
NOTE 1 When one hardware option is mounted and the software option is uniquely decided, the function can run even if NC parameters No.970-972 are set to 0. 2 The Data Server function cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet. If using the Data Server function, dont set 1 to NC parameter No.970. 3 When the Ethernet function and the FL-net function are available, these functions can operate on the same hardware by specifying the same hardware on the NC parameters No.970 and 971 as the FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function. And, each function can operate on the different hardware by specifying the different hardware. Please refer to FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL (B-64163EN) about FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function. 4 When the Ethernet function and the Data Server function are available, these functions must operate on the same hardware according to the NC parameter No.970. These functions cannot operate on the different hardware. 5 When the Ethernet function, the Data Server function, and the FL-net function are available, the NC parameters No.970 and 971 have to set the different hardware. In this case, the Ethernet function and the FL-net function cannot operate on the same hardware.
2.4
SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE OPTIONS
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, when using the Ethernet function, Data Server function, and FL-net function, please select hardware and software basically according to the following procedure.
- 10 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
2.ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Do you use Data Server function?
no
Do you use Ethernet function? yes
no
Do you use FL-net function? yes
no No Ethe rnets
yes NOTE1) no
Do you use FL-net function? yes Do you use two FL-net functions at the same time? yes
Do you use FL-net function? yes
no One Ethe rnet case7 no Do you use FL-net/Ethe rnet coexisting function? no yes
Do you use two FL-net functions at the same time? yes Two Ethernets case4
no
no
Do you use two FL-net functions at the same time? yes no Do you use FL-net/Ethe rnet coexisting function? yes Two Ethernets case3
One Ethe rnet case6
One Ethe rnet case8
Three Ethernets case1
One Ethe rnet case5
Two Ethernets case2
LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

Required hardware case 1 case 2 case 3 case 4 case 5 case 6 case 7 case 8 Three Ethernets Two Ethernets Two Ethernets Two Ethernets One Ethernet One Ethernet One Ethernet One Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot2) Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Multi-function Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet Required software option J692 S737 (+S707) R964 J692 S737 (+S707) S707 + J692 R964 J692 R964 S737 (+S707) S707 + J692 S707 J692 NC parameters No.970 = 3 No.971 = 1 No.972 = 4 No.970 = 3 No.971 = 1 No.970 = 1 No.971 = 1 No.972 = 3 No.971 = 1 No.972 = 3 No.970 = 3 No.970 = 1 No.971 = 1 No.970 = 1 No.971 = 1
Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

Required hardware case 1 (NOTE2) case 2 case 3 Three Ethernets Two Ethernets Two Ethernets Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot2) Fast Ethernet board (slot3) Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot2) Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot2) Required software option J692 S737 (+S707) R964 J692 S737 (+S707) S707 + J692 R964 NC parameters No.970 = 3 No.971 = 4 No.972 = 5 No.970 = 3 No.971 = 4 No.970 = 3 No.971 = 3 No.972 = 4
- 11 -
2. ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
SPECIFICATION
Required hardware Required software option J692 R964 S737 (+S707) S707 + J692 S707 J692
B-64014EN/04
NC parameters No.971 = 3 No.972 = 4 No.970 = 3 No.970 = 3 No.971 = 3 No.970 = 3 No.971 = 3
case 4 case 5 case 6 case 7 case 8
Two Ethernets One Ethernet One Ethernet One Ethernet One Ethernet
Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot2) Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot1)
NOTE 1 When the Data Server function is selected, whether the Ethernet function is selected does not affect the subsequent selection procedure because the Ethernet and Data Server functions always operate on the same hardware. 2 It is not selectable because only two option boards can be mounted in the stand-alone type of Series 35i-B.
2.5
SCREEN LAYOUT
In this manual, each screen has described the example of the screen of Series 30i/31i/32i-A. A basic content is the same though a detailed layout might be different. The hardware can be confirmed in title part of each screen of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B.
The kind of the hardware is shown on the title bar as the above example like [MULTI FUNC ETHER].
Title [MUTI-FUNC ETHER] [BOARD(SLOT1)] [BOARD(SLOT2)] [BOARD(SLOT3)] [BOARD(SLOT4)] Description Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B Option board mounted in the optional slot 1 Option board mounted in the optional slot 2 Option board mounted in the optional slot 3 Option board mounted in the optional slot 4
- 12 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
The Data Server functions use a memory card built into a board for storing files and can transfer files and perform DNC operation using FTP. A Data Server can operate on both FTP client and FTP server. When you use a Data Server to transfer files, the Data Server operates as an FTP client and communicates with the FTP server on the host computer. When you use the host computer to transfer files, the Data Server operates as an FTP server and communicates with the FTP client on the host computer.
NOTE 1 The Data Server functions cannot be used with the Series 35i-B. 2 Before communicating with the host computer using the Data Server functions, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the personal computer because the personal computer environment may affect communication operation. 3 When the host computer operates as an FTP server, FTP server software must be run on the host computer. When the host computer operates as an FTP client, FTP client software must be run on the host computer.
3.1
DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT
With the Data Server functions, you can format the built-in memory card in the CNC file management mode to manage NC programs.
CNC file management

For NC programs managed in the CNC file management mode, memory operation such as custom macro commands and M98-based subprogram calling are available. Operate the NC programs using the PROGRAM FOLDER screen in the same way as for NC programs in the CNC memory. As a CNC external input/output device, DNC operation and M198-based subprogram calling are available. In this case, operate NC programs using the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen.
PROGRAM FOLDER screen
Edit operation CNC file management Memory operation
DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen
(DNC operation is also available.) File transfer operation
NOTE 1 The Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B allows editing and memory operation of NC programs stored on the memory card, so the method of managing files on the memory card differs from the file management method of Data Servers for the Series 16i-B and so on. Note that, therefore, the memory card of the 30i-A is not compatible with the memory cards of Data Servers for the Series 16i-B and so on.
- 13 -
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
NOTE 2 For operation and details of the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, refer to Chapter, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in the "OPERATORS MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)." 3 For operation and details of the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, refer to Chapter 1, "OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS," in Part IV, "OPERATION."
3.1.1
File Names of CNC File Management
You can assign a file name to a file managed in the CNC file management mode in the same way as for CNC memory. Up to 32 characters Alphabetic characters (in upper and lower cases), numeric characters, and four symbols (+, -, _, and .)
NOTE 1 File names are case-sensitive. 2 Any file name or folder name cannot begin with a period (.). 3 It is impossible to assign the same name to a file and a folder. File names and program numbers
When a file name assigned to a file consists of uppercase O and a numeric value, the file name is treated as a program number. Values ranging from 1 to 9999 can be used (values ranging from 1 to 99999999 can be used according to the parameter setting). A value beyond this range cannot be used for a file name in the program number format. Example) File names that can be used as program numbers O0123 Program number 123 O0001 Program number 1 O3000 Program number 3000 O9999 Program number 9999 File names that cannot be used as program numbers ABC (Does not have the format "O plus a numeric value") o123 (Does not begin with uppercase letter "O") O123.4 (Uses a character other than numeric characters)
NOTE When files on a Data Server are managed by program number, their program numbers always consist of "O" plus a 4-digit number ("O" plus a 8-digit number). So, even if there are files managed with different file names such as "O1" and "O01" on a personal computer, their program numbers are regarded as the same when these files are transferred to the Data Server.
3.1.2
Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server
In the initial status, the maximum number of files which can be registered on a memory card on a Data Server is 2047 and the maximum file size is 512 MB. Each folder is counted as one file. The maximum number of files and the maximum file size can be changed using NC parameter No. 930.
- 14 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."
3.1.3
Text Files and Binary Files
You can store the following two types of files on a memory card on a Data Server: text files and binary files. For a text file, memory operation and edit operation as well as DNC operation can be performed by selecting it as a main program. For binary files, only DNC operation is available, but binary input operation in the high-speed remote buffer A format is available. If NC data other than an NC program is not handled as a binary file, it may not be able to be input or output correctly. NC data output and stored on a memory card on a Data Server from the CNC is automatically handled as a binary file. A file to be transferred from a personal computer to a memory card on a Data Server must be specified explicitly as a binary file. More specifically, for GET operation on a Data Server operation screen, you can use soft key [GET] or [BGET] to specify whether to handle the file as a text file or a binary file. When the Data Server is used as an FTP server, you can execute an ASCII (text file) command or a BIN (binary file) command on your personal computer (FTP client) to specify whether to handle the file as a text file or a binary file.
NOTE 1 An NC program stored as a text file is converted to an editable file format so that the file can be edited on the CNC. For this reason, when a text file is read from the host computer to the memory card on the Data Server, then the file is transferred to the host computer, binary compatibility can no longer be maintained. 2 The file name of a text file and the O number or arbitrary file name in the program are always the same. See Section 3.5, NC PROGRAM FORMAT for details
3.2
DATA SERVER MODES
Each Data Server mode determines the input or output destination when a Data Server is operated as a CNC external input/output device. You can select one of the following three modes.
NOTE Data Server modes are valid only when the Data Server is operated as an external storage device of the CNC. In case of main program operation for editing and a memory operation and an M98-based subprogram call, programs on the memory card of the Data Server are selected regardless of the Data Server mode. Storage mode
The memory card built into the Data Server is selected as the external input/output device. For example, when DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is executed, the relevant NC program is called from the memory card built into the Data Server. When input operation is executed for the Data Server, the relevant NC program is read from the memory card built into the Data Server. Conversely, when NC program output operation is executed for the Data Server, the output NC program is written on the memory card built into the Data Server.
- 15 -
SPECIFICATION Input
B-64014EN/04
CNC memory
Data Server Memory card
Output DNC operation
FTP mode
The host computer connected to the Data Server is selected as the external input/output device. For example, when DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is executed, the relevant NC program is called from the host computer. When input operation is executed for the Data Server, the relevant NC program is read from the host computer connected to the Data Server. Conversely, when NC program output operation is executed for the Data Server, the output NC program is directly written on the host computer.
Data Server Input Host computer Output DNC operation CNC memory
CAUTION 1 In the FTP mode, an NC program is transferred from the host computer to the CNC. For this reason, if the line is disconnected during communication for some reason such as noise on the network, the disconnection directly affects the CNC operation as compared with the storage mode. Before DNC operation in the FTP mode, surely take measures to prevent noise and make sure that good communication conditions are present. 2 When feed hold is performed during DNC operation in the FTP mode, communication with the host computer may be stopped. In this case, the host computer may disconnect the communication. Perform feed hold during a trial run and completely confirm that the communication with the host computer is not disconnected. Buffer mode
The host computer connected to the Data Server is selected as the external input device. In the buffer mode unlike the FTP mode, however, areas on the memory card built into the Data Server are used as intermediate buffers. For details of the buffer mode, see Section 2.3, "DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE," which is the following section. As the external output device, the memory card built into the Data Server is selected. When NC program output operation is performed, the operation equivalent to that in the storage mode is performed.
- 16 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
Data Server Memory card Intermediate buffers

Output CNC memory Input DNC operation
Host computer
NOTE 1 With the Series 30i/31i-A, to use the buffer mode, the buffer mode function option (J728) is required. 2 With the Series 32i-A, the buffer mode cannot be used.
3.3
DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE
In the buffer mode, two areas (areas A and B) are prepared on the memory card. While the NC program data stored in one area is being supplied to the CNC, the subsequent NC program data is read in the other area from the host computer using FTP transfer. When all data in the former area has been supplied to the CNC, the data in the latter area is supplied to the CNC. In the former area, which becomes empty, the subsequent NC program data is read from the host computer using FTP transfer. Repeating this operation enables an NC program larger than the capacity of the memory card to be handled. To use the buffer mode, however, the original NC program must be divided into some files on the host computer in advance. The size of a divided file must be smaller than half the remaining capacity of the memory card. If the size of a divided file is too large (for example, 100 MB or more), it takes much time to read the first file from the host computer and it also takes time until operation starts.
Using the buffer mode

In the buffer mode, a file (such as Oxxxx) called by DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is a file list. The file list contains the names of files to be called in the order in which they are to be called. In the buffer mode, the Data Server sequentially calls the files specified in the file list from the host computer and supplies data to the CNC.
CNC Data Server Host computer
Program call Oxxxx
Hard disk Memory card Area A get (FTP) Oxxxx file1 file2 file3 file4 file5 Contents of Oxxxx file1 file2 file3 file4 file5
file1 file2 file3 file4 file5
Area B
- 17 -
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
Files (file1 to file5) specified in the file list on the host computer are stored on the memory card built into the Data Server using FTP transfer and supplied to the CNC. In the buffer mode, after the CNC issues a request to read an NC program to the Data Server, the specified file list is read from the host computer. When the first file has been read, the Data Server starts supplying data to the CNC. For this reason, it takes time from when the CNC issues a request to read a program to when the Data Server starts supplying data. While the Data Server is supplying the data in one area to the CNC, it stores data into the other area using FTP transfer. For this reason, divide the original program data so that two consecutive files can be contained on the memory card built into the Data Server. Although the data in one area has been supplied to the CNC, FTP transfer may not terminate for the other area. In this case, program calling terminates abnormally because the subsequent data cannot be supplied. You can use a parameter not to cause the abnormal termination. In the file list, you can specify any file name allowed by the host computer that consists of up to 255 single-byte alphanumeric characters. Be sure to specify at least one LF (0A in hexadecimal) or CR (0D in hexadecimal) following each file name in the file list to delimit the file names.
NOTE In the buffer mode, you can also register a new file on the memory card built into the Data Server by the "NC program GET" or "NC program output" operation. By this operation, however, the remaining capacity of the memory card built into the Data Server that is required for operation in the buffer mode may be exhausted, resulting in an error in DNC operation in the buffer mode. For this reason, during DNC operation in the buffer mode, do not register any new file on the memory card built into the Data Server. Dividing an NC program into files
To perform operation in the buffer mode, divide an original NC program into several files on the host computer and create a file list indicating the order in which the divided files are to be transferred in advance.
- 18 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
Example) Dividing an NC program into three files

% O1234(SAMPLE); : : : X1.Y1.Z1.; X2.Y2.Z2.; : : : X3.Y3.Z3.; X4.Y4.Z4.; : : : M30; % % O1234(SAMPLE); : : : X1.Y1.Z1.; X2.Y2.Z2.; : : : X3.Y3.Z3.; X4.Y4.Z4.; : : : M30; %
Dividing the program into three files
file1
file2
file3
file1 file2 file3
O1234
As shown above, divide an original NC file into three files, file1, file2, and file3. Specify the divided file names in the file list (file name: O1234).
CAUTION In the above example, the NC program is divided into files so that any block is not divided. You can divide a program at a point in a block. When dividing a program at a point in a block, be careful so that any unnecessary character is not inserted at the end of each file. If an unnecessary character is inserted at the end of a file, the NC program may perform unexpected operation when executed. Be very careful when preparing and editing an NC program on the host computer. NOTE 1 Divide an NC program into files so that each file size is about 20 to 30 MB. If the file size is too large, it takes time until DNC operation starts. If the file size is too small, data transmission may stop between files and operation may stop. 2 Although you can divide an NC program at a point in a block, divide the program in block units whenever possible and retract the tool at the end of each divided file. This prevents data transmission from stopping at the end of a file and cutter marking from being made. 3 Store the file list and relevant divided files in the same directory on the same host computer.
- 19 -
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
3.4
OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER
NOTE The Data Server functions produce an effect when large NC programs are operated. Use the Data Server Functions to handle large NC programs. Memory operation
You can perform memory operation for an NC program on the memory card built into a Data Server in the same way as for an NC program in the CNC memory. You can also supply an NC program simultaneously for a multipath CNC system.
NOTE When memory operation is performed, a selected NC program on the Data Server must be a text file. It is impossible to use a binary file for memory operation. M198 subprogram operation
In the storage mode, you can perform M198 calling from the memory card built into a Data Server. In the FTP or buffer mode, you can perform M198 calling form the host computer. On the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, set an M198 folder in advance. When M198 calling is specified, the set M198 folder is searched for the target subprogram.
DNC operation
In the storage mode, you can perform DNC operation from the memory card built into a Data Server. In the FTP or buffer mode, you can perform DNC operation from the host computer. On the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, set the file name for DNC operation in advance. When DNC operation starts, the set DNC operation file is called.
3.5
NC PROGRAM FORMAT
NC programs prepared on the host computer must have the following format:
% TITLE ; O0001(COMMENT) ; M30 ; %
An NC program starts with a start file mark (%). In the subsequent part (leader section) until EOB (;, program start) is encountered, a comment such as a title can be inserted as necessary. At the beginning of the program section, be sure to specify an O number or arbitrary file name consisting of up to 32 characters that is enclosed with < and > as the program name. This O number or file name must be used for management on the personal computer. If the O number or arbitrary file name in an NC program and the file name in the personal computer are not the same, the file name in the personal computer is used basically when the program is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server (NOTE 2).
- 20 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
The semicolon ";" used at the end of each block means EOB (end of block) and actually functions as LF (LF: 0A in hexadecimal), CR-LF (CR: 0D in hexadecimal), or LF-CR-CR. The NC program must end with "M code ; %". When performing binary input operation, insert data for binary input operation, enclosed with the start code and end code of binary input operation, into the part ". . ." in the above figure. For details of the NC program configuration and binary input operation, refer to the relevant CNC OPERATORS MANUAL.
WARNING If an NC program prepared on the host computer does not use the program format specified by the CNC, executing the NC program can cause an unpredictable operation. So, special care should be taken when an NC program is prepared on the host computer. NOTE 1 Any unrecognizable character codes in an NC program registered as a text file on a memory card on a Data Server are ignored. Do not use any unrecognizable character code. A 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may be recognized as an invalid character code when the system recognizes it on a byte-by-byte basis. Do not use any 2-byte code used for Japanese and others. 2 The system always manages each text file on the memory card so that the file name and the O number or arbitrary file name in the program are the same. For this reason, if they are different, the system sets the O number or arbitrary file name to the file name when transferring the file. The O number or arbitrary file name in the program can also be set as the file name when the file is transferred according to the parameter setting, however.
- 21 -
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
3.6
LIST FILE FORMAT
In the LIST-GET, LIST-PUT, and LIST-DELETE functions described later, one of the following list file formats must be used: Format 1
% ; O0001(COMMENT) ; N111 ; N222 ; N333 ; : : N999 ; %
Format 3
% ; O0001(COMMENT) ; (Dtsvr-File) ; (Dtsvr-File) ; (Dtsvr-File) ; : : (Dtsvr-File) ; %
Format 2
% ; O0001(COMMENT) N111 (PC-File) N222 (PC-File) N333 (PC-File) : : N999 (PC-File) % ; ; ; ;
Format 4
% ; O0001(COMMENT) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) : : (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) %
; ; ;
Specifications common to all formats

<1> A list file begins with a start file mark "%". <2> In the next block, be sure to specify an O number. Assign this O number as the file name. A comment enclosed in parentheses "(" and ")" can be inserted between the O number and EOB. <3> In the subsequent blocks, specify files to be processed. <4> The list file must end with "%".
Specifications of format 1
The following describes the specifications of list file format 1: <1> This specification method applies when the file names of files to be processed have the format "Oxxxx" (where "xxxx" denotes a 4-digit number). In this case, change "O" in file name "Oxxxx" to "N" when specifying the file name. The 4-digit number can be zero-suppressed. The example shows that files O0111, O0222, O0333, and so on up to O0999 are processed sequentially. <2> The LIST-GET service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server without modifying file names "Oxxxx". The LIST-PUT service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer without modifying file names "Oxxxx". The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.
- 22 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
The following describes the specifications of list file format 2: <1> This specification method applies when files to be processed are named "Oxxxx" (where "xxxx" denotes a 4-digit number) on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and are named arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer. In this case, change "O" in file name "Oxxxx" to "N" when specifying the file name on the Fast Data Server. The 4-digit number can be zero-suppressed. The example shows that files O0111, O0222, O0333, and so on up to O0999 are processed sequentially. A file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer can be specified by enclosing it with parentheses "(" and ")" following the corresponding "Nxxxx". The characters that can be used in file names depend on the OS of the host computer. <2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "PC-File" stored on the built-in hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server as "Oxxxx" files. The LIST-PUT service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer as files with arbitrary file names "PC-File". The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.
The following describes the specifications of list file format 3: <1> This specification method applies when the file names of files to be processed are arbitrary file names. In this case, file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and on the built-in hard disk of the host computer are assumed to be the same. Specify an arbitrary file name enclosed with parentheses "(" and ")". The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names are the following 66 ASCII characters only: Numeric characters 0 to 9 Lowercase letters a to z Uppercase letters A to Z Four symbols (+, -, _, .) <2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "Dtsvr-File" stored on the built-in hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server with the file names kept unchanged. The LIST-PUT service transfers "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer with the file names "Dtsvr-File" kept unchanged. The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.
The following describes the specifications of list file format 4: <1> This specification method applies when files to be processed have arbitrary file names. In this case, file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer are assumed to be different. Specify a file name on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and a file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer in parentheses, separated by a comma ",". The characters that can be used in file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server are the following 66 ASCII characters only: Numeric characters 0 to 9 Lowercase letters a to z Uppercase letters A to Z Four symbols (+, -, _, .) The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer depend on the OS of the host computer. <2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "PC-File" stored on the built-in hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server as "Dtsvr-File" files.
- 23 -
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
The LIST-PUT service transfers "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server to files with file name "PC-File" on the built-in hard disk of the host computer. The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.
Limitations on file names in a list file

The following limitations apply when file names are specified in a list file: <1> The characters that can be used in file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server are the following 66 ASCII characters only: Numeric characters 0 to 9 Lowercase letters a to z Uppercase letters A to Z Four symbols (+, -, _, .) The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer depend on the OS of the host computer. <2> Up to 255 characters can be used as an arbitrary file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer. However, the number of characters that can actually be used depends on the OS of the host computer.
Storage locations of list files

The LIST-GET, LIST-PUT, and LIST-DELETE services are useful functions for managing NC programs in groups. The places where list files are prepared vary depending on the service to be executed. For the LIST-GET service, NC programs to be operated on are present on the built-in hard disk of the host computer, so list files are placed also on the built-in hard disk of the host computer. For the LIST-PUT and LIST-DELETE services, NC programs to be operated on are present on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server, so list files are also prepared on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.
3.7
DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION
The following functions are added to FTP Server function of Data Server. Increase of FTP Server connections. The number of FTP server connections can be increased from five to ten by this feature. Connection with Windows Explorer. When you use the Windows Explorer as an FTP client software, you can make a new folder and overwrite a file. For the FTP client operation using the Explorer, see APPENDIX D.2, "OPERATION USING THE Explorer." Addition of maintenance screen for FTP server. You can monitor the state of FTP server. And you can disconnect the connection of FTP client forcedly. For the operation of the maintenance screen, see Section 2.5, "FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE" in Part VI, "MAINTENANCE."
NOTE 1 To use the DataServer Explorer connection, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is required. 2 Some FTP client software programs may each internally use two or more FTP clients. Note, therefore, that the number of FTP clients is not always equal to the number of applications.
- 24 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
4.FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
The FOCAS2/Ethernet functions can remotely control and monitor the CNC by using a personal computer. For details, refer to the manual delivered with the FOCAS2 library software.
NOTE 1 In the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the CNC operates as a server and waits for a communication start request from a personal computer that operates as a client. As communication with the personal computer starts, two sockets are used for control and monitoring from the personal computer and for file transfer. 2 For the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the machine tool builder or end user can create desired software operated on each personal computer using the FOCAS2 library software. Communication timing and other factors may vary depending on the personal computer environment. Before starting communication, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the personal computer.
- 25 -
5.DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
5
DNS
DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS
If DNS/DHCP is used for communication setting of the Data Server functions and FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, Ethernet addresses (IP address and subnet mask) can be set at a time on the host computer to facilitate Ethernet address control.
With the DNS function, a fully qualified domain name (e.g., www.fanuc.co.jp) can be specified instead of a hard-to-remember IP address just consisting of numbers (e.g., 192.168.0.10) when a TCP/IP communication destination is to be specified.
NOTE To use the DNS function, a personal computer having the DNS server function is additionally required. See Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION," in Part III, "SETTING," and APPENDIX C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP." DHCP
With the DHCP function, Ethernet addresses (IP address and subnet mask) that need to be set on the CNC can be set on the host computer.
NOTE To use the DHCP function, a personal computer having the DHCP server function is additionally required. See Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION," in Part III, "SETTING," and Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
- 26 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
6.MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
With the machine remote diagnosis functions, checking of the internal CNC status, ladder program editing, and other operations can be performed as necessary by using a personal computer through a LAN. For details, refer to Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATORS MANUAL (B-63734EN).
- 27 -
7. UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
With the unsolicited messaging function, the CNC transmits messages (CNC/PMC data) in an unsolicited manner to application software on the personal computer according to a command from an NC program or ladder program. By using this function, the need for application processing on the personal computer to periodically inquire about the state of the CNC can be eliminated.
When the conventional function is used

Application software Inquiry Response Application checks for CNC/PMC data changes.
When the unsolicited messaging function is used

NC program or ladder program NC program or ladder program checks for CNC/PMC data changes. Application software
Application receives notification from CNC.
Notification
NOTE The unsolicited messaging function is a part of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. Unsolicited messaging function execution procedure
The execution procedure for the unsolicited messaging function is described below. 1 Preparation on the personal computer Create an application using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and install the unsolicited message server on a personal computer. For the method of creating an application using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and the method of installing the unsolicited message server, refer to Chapter 5, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION", in "FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window Library Operator's Manual". Preparation on the CNC Create an NC program or ladder program for controlling unsolicited messaging. For the method of creating an NC program or ladder program, see Section 6.2, "EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION" in Part III, OPERATION. Setting of the communication parameters for the unsolicited messaging function To use the unsolicited messaging function, the following communication parameter settings are needed: (1) Setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function (2) Setting of the parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
- 28 -
B-64014EN/04
SPECIFICATION
7.UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
For (2), a choice can be made from two modes of setting: CNC mode for setting on the CNC screen and the PC mode for setting on the personal computer. For the setting method of (1) and (2), see Section 6.1, "SETTING OF THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION in Part III, OPERATION. 4 Starting the NC program or ladder program Start the NC program or ladder program created in step 2, "Preparation on the CNC". At this time, no unsolicited message is transmitted to the personal computer until step 5, "Starting the unsolicited messaging function", is executed. Starting the unsolicited messaging function Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart on the personal computer. This execution places the CNC in the state (named "Ready") where a transmission request from the NC program or ladder program is awaited. Each time a transmission request is made from the NC program or ladder program, an unsolicited message is automatically transmitted to the personal computer. Ending the unsolicited messaging function To end unsolicited message transmission, execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop on the personal computer. This execution places the CNC in the state (named "Not Ready") where no unsolicited message is transmitted even when a request for transmission is made from the NC program or ladder program.
- 29 -
8. FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/04
FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
The FTP file transfer function is operated from the CNC to transfer a file. It works as an FTP client and communicates with the FTP server on the host computer.
NOTE 1 Before communicating with the host computer using the FTP file transfer function, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the personal computer because the personal computer environment may affect communication operation. 2 To operate the host computer as the FTP server, FTP server software must be operated on the host computer.
- 30 -
III. SETTING
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
1.SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

Data Server functions FOCAS2/Ethernet functions CNC screen display functions Machine remote diagnosis functions Unsolicited messaging function FTP file transfer function
This part describes the settings required to operate the following Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server functions:
Notes on using the functions for the first time CAUTION When setting the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server for the first time, carefully set data such as an IP address and conduct a sufficient communication test, consulting with your network administrator. If data such as an IP address is not set correctly, a communication failure can affect the entire network. Take sufficient care. The load on the network may become greater than expected depending on the performance of the personal computer. Before using the functions, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the personal computer.
1.1
BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
This section explains how to back up communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server to the memory card and to restore them from the memory card. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the function key .
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press the soft keys [COMMON] - [(OPRT)] and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], and [ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring communication parameters appear. Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed. The character string EXECUTING blinks during execution.
- 33 -
1. SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
NOTE With the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the USB memory can be used in addition to the memory card.
BACKUP
The communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication parameters are saved to the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name ETHERBRD.MEM is used.
RESTORE
The communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server are read from the memory card and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication parameters are read from the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name ETHERBRD.MEM is used.
ALL BACKUP
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, and CC-Link remote device are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication parameters are saved to the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name NETWORK.MEM is used.
ALL RESTORE
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, and CC-Link remote device are read from the memory card and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC, that parameter is not saved to the SRAM.
- 34 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
1.SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the parameters are read from the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name NETWORK.MEM is used.
CAUTION While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device. NOTE 1 A backup or restore operation for communication parameters can only be performed in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or emergency stop state. 2 When communication parameters are restored, an alarm condition occurs that requires power-off. Related NC parameters
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input/output device
[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device. 17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device. It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other devices.
NOTE In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the memory card is used regardless for this NC parameter.
- 35 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the communication setting for the Data Server functions.
Notes on using the Data Server functions CAUTION 1 Operation cannot be guaranteed for any memory card that is not recommended by FANUC. 2 When using the Fast Data Server for the first time, be sure to format the memory card, set parameters, then turn the power off then back on. If an attempt is made to use the Data Server functions without following these steps, normal operation is not guaranteed. 3 Before performing FTP communication using the Fast Data Server for the first time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence such as a communication failure on the entire network. Be very careful about any communication failure. If a Data Server is used on a network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure intermittently occurs in the Data Server, which may cause a CNC system error. 4 When the power to the CNC is turned off during access to the memory card, files stored on the memory card may be destroyed. So, be careful not to turn off the power to the CNC during access to the memory card. 5 In preparation for damage to the memory card, always take backup copies of the files stored on the memory card to the host computer. NOTE 1 With the Data Server functions (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only one FTP server. 2 With the Data Server functions (FTP server), a single CNC can connect up to five FTP clients. However, some FTP client software programs may each internally use two or more FTP clients. Note, therefore, that the number of FTP clients is not always equal to the number of applications. If the DataServer Explorer connection is enabled, one CNC can connect up to ten FTP clients. For the DataServer Explorer connection, see Section 3.7, "DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION," in Part II, "SPECIFICATION." 3 The Data Server functions do not support passive mode (PASV command).
2.1
Procedure
1
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN
This section describes the setting screen for operating the Data Server functions.
Press the function key
- 36 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
2 3 4
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [DATA SERVER] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
COMMON screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address of the Fast Data Server. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS Description Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address
NOTE The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" provided later. Data Server screens (CONNECT 1, CONNECT 2, CONNECT 3)
Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen. By using page keys set.
- 37 -
, the three host computers at connection destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
Data Server screens (for connection destination 1)
Setting item
Item HOST NAME PORT NUMBER USER NAME PASSWORD LOGIN FOLDER Description Specify the IP address of the host computer. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200") Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used. Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specify the password for the above user name. The password must always be specified. Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.) If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.
Operation
Select a connection destination. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [HOST SELECT]. Then, press soft key [HOST SELECT] to display soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3].
Press one of soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] according to the host computer to which you want to make a connection. The screen title of connection destination 1, 2 or 3 is displayed in reverse video. The screen title displayed in reverse video indicates the connection destination host computer.
When connection destination 1 is selected
- 38 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
Data Server screens (FTP SERVER)

Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen. By using page keys destination 1, 2, or 3 screen. , the FTP server setting screen is displayed after the connection
Data Server screens (FTP SERVER)
Setting item
Item USER NAME PASSWORD LOGIN FOLDER Description Specify a user name to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server. (A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specify the password for the above user name. The password must always be specified. Specify a work folder to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.) If no data is set, the home folder (home directory) is used as a login folder.
Data Server MODE screen (SETTING)

Press soft key [DS MODE] to display the Data Server MODE screen (SETTING). The current mode can be checked and changed.
- 39 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
Data Server screen (SETTING)
Display item
Item CHANNELS MODE Description Displays the number of channels currently being used. Displays the currently set Data Server mode. STORAGE MODE FTP MODE BUFFER MODE
Operation
The Data Server mode can be changed. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft keys [STRAGE MODE], [FTP MODE], and [BUFFER MODE].
To change the mode to a desired mode, press the soft key of the desired mode.
NOTE 1 With the Series 30i/31i-A, to use the buffer mode, the buffer mode function option (J728) is required. 2 With the Series 32i-A, the buffer mode cannot be used. Data Server MODE screen (MAINTENANCE)
Press soft key [DS MODE] and press page keys channel. to display maintenance information for each
- 40 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
Data Server MODE screen (MAINTENANCE)
Display item
Item CHANNEL Description Interface number of the buffer used for transferring NC programs between the CNC and Data Server. For example, a channel is assigned to each path. Used for maintenance. This item indicates the number of cases where the buffer becomes empty while NC programs are being transferred from the Data Server to the CNC. Used for maintenance. This item indicates the total number of bytes transferred when an NC program is transferred from the Data Server. Used for maintenance. This item indicates the buffer use status when NC programs are transferred from the Data Server to the CNC.
EMPTY COUNTER
TOTAL SIZE
WRITE POINTER READ POINTER
- 41 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS Data Server FORMAT screen
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
Press soft key [DS FORMAT] to display the format screen of the memory card built into the Data Server.
Data Server FORMAT screen
Display item
Item DEVICE NAME Description Indicates the storage media currently being used by the Data Server. "ATA" or "NONE" is indicated. ATA : A memory card is mounted. None : No memory card is mounted. Indicates the format type of the memory card. "CNC FILE" or "---" is displayed. When "---" is displayed, check whether the memory card is mounted properly and is formatted correctly. Indicates the check result. When no check is made : ----- When the check result is normal : OK When the check result is abnormal : NG
FORMAT TYPE
CHECK DISK
Procedure (CHECK DISK)

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CHECK DISK].
Press soft key [EXEC] to check the format of the memory card and display the check result.
CAUTION If the check result is abnormal, determine the cause of trouble from an error message displayed on the ETHERNET LOG screen and back up the files stored on the memory card immediately. Then, try to reformat the memory card.
- 42 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
NOTE 1 An error occurs if other Data Server functions are operated when a check disk is made. 2 Also when a program on the memory card of the Data Server is selected as a main program, the check disk operation cannot be performed.
Procedure (CNC FORMAT)

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CNC FORMAT].
Press soft key [EXEC] to format the memory card built into the Fast Data Server.
CAUTION 1 Do not turn off the power to the CNC when the memory card is being formatted. Otherwise, the memory card can be damaged. 2 When the memory card is formatted, all files held on the memory card are erased. NOTE 1 An error occurs if other Data Server functions are operated when the memory card is formatted. 2 Also when a program on the memory card of the Data Server is selected as a main program, the memory card cannot be formatted.
2.2
0000
The NC parameters related to the Data Server functions are described below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TVC
[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #0 TVC When a file is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server, a TV check is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed.
NOTE This parameter is valid only for text files. For text files, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Text Files and Binary Files" in Part II, "SPECIFICATION."
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection
[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 5 : Selects the Data Server as the input/output device.
#7 0100 #6 #5 #4 #3 NCR #2 CRF #1 CTV #0
[Input type] Setting input

- 43 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
[Data type] Bit #1 CTV When a file is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server, character counting for the TV check in program comment parts is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed. #2 CRF When a file is output from the Data Server to the personal computer, EOB (end of block) is: 0: Set as specified by parameter NCR (bit 3 of parameter No. 100). 1: Set to "CR" "LF". #3 NCR When a file is output from the Data Server to the personal computer, EOB (end of block) is: 0: Set to "LF" "CR" "CR". 1: Set to "LF".
NOTE This parameter is valid only for text files. For text files, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Text Files and Binary Files" in Part II, "SPECIFICATION."
#7 0904 LCH #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 BWT
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 BWT If FTP communication is behind data supply during DNC operation in the buffer mode of the Data Server: 0: An error is caused. 1: No error is caused and DNC operation continues after waiting the completion of FTP communication. #7 LCH In the LIST-GET service of the Data Server, when a list file specifies 1025 or more files: 0: A check for duplicated file names is performed. 1: A check for duplicated file names is not performed.
#7 0905 #6 #5 #4 #3 DSF #2 #1 PCH #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.
NOTE Usually, set Performed (0). When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is recognized due to no server on the network. For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so that it does not respond to the PING command. Set 1 when the Data Server communicates with such a personal computer.
#3 DSF When an NC program is stored on the memory card of the Data Server: 0: The file name takes priority. 1: The program name in the NC program takes priority.
- 44 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
NOTE This parameter is valid only when files on a personal computer are registered as text files on the memory card on the Data Server by CNC operation.
#7 0906 #6 #5 SCM #4 #3 #2 OVW #1 #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 OVW When the Data Server is operated as an FTP server, if a file having the same name as a file to be transferred from the FTP client is already stored in the memory card of Data Server: 0: An error is caused. 1: No error is caused and the existing file is overwritten.
NOTE To use this parameter, the DataServer Explorer connection option is required.
#5 SCM As the mode for accessing the memory card on the Data Server: 0: The mode supported by the memory card that is automatically determined is used. 1: The conventional PIO mode 2 is used.
NOTE 1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 2 This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
0921 0922 0923 Selects the host computer 1 OS. Selects the host computer 2 OS. Selects the host computer 3 OS.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 2 0: Windows95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7. 1: UNIX/VMS. 2: Linux.
NOTE Some FTP server software may not depend on the OS. Therefore, the valid file list may not be displayed by the above setting.
0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet function wait time setting
[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]
Parameter input Word msec 0 to 32767 Specifies the wait time (in 1 ms units) for the FOCAS2/Ethernet service when it is used together with the Data Server functions. If 0 is specified, a wait time of 1 ms is assumed.
- 45 -

0929
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
Specifies the attribute of the file to be transferred in operating as an FTP server.
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 2 Specifies whether to use the file attribute specified in the FTP TYPE command when the Data Server operates as an FTP server.
No.929 0 1 2 Meaning Uses the file attribute specified in the TYPE command from the FTP client. Fixes the attribute to text. Fixes the attribute to binary.
0930
Maximum number of files that can be registered to the memory card of the Data Server and maximum size per file that can be registered
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0, 10 to 15
No.930 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 Maximum number of files 2047 511 1023 2047 4095 8191 16383 Maximum size per file 512MB 2048MB 1024MB 512MB 256MB 128MB 64MB
NOTE 1 When the memory card is formatted after this parameter is set, the maximum number of files and maximum size per file are changed. 2 Each folder is counted as one file. 3 This parameter is valid when the series and edition of the Data Server function software are edition 11 or later of series 6569.
#7 3107 #6 #5 #4 SOR #3 #2 #1 #0
[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #4 SOR In the Data Server FILE LIST screen, files are displayed: 0: In the order of zero-suppressed program number. 1: In the order of program name.
#7 3233 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 PDM #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 PDM When the Data Server FILE LIST screen is displayed: 0: The setting of an M198 operation folder/DNC operation file is enabled. 1: The setting of a foreground/background folder is enabled.
- 46 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
NOTE When an M198 external subprogram call or DNC operation is performed on the Data Server, set this bit to 0. For the foreground and background folders, refer to Chapter, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in the OPERATORS MANUAL of the CNC.
2.3
EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
An example of setting for operating the Data Server functions is given below. In this example of setting, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through a Data Server.
HUB
100BASE-TX (or 10BASE-T)
CNC 1
CNC 2
PC 1
CNC 1 IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS CONNECT 1 PORT NUMBER IP ADDRESS USER NAME PASSWORD LOGIN FOLDER DATA SERVER MODE NC Parameter NO. 20 192.168.0.100 255.255.255.0 None 21 192.168.0.200 user user None Storage 5
CNC 2 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 None 21 192.168.0.200 user user None Storage 5 The Data Server setting screen is used for setting. The Data Server mode setting screen is used for setting. NC parameter setting The common setting screen is used for setting.
PC 1 IP address Sub-net mask Default gateway User name Password Home folder 192.168.0.200 255.255.255.0 None user user default
"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.
"User account of the personal computer (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting. "Internet service manager" of the personal computer (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.
- 47 -
3. SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen display functions.
CAUTION Before performing communication using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions for the first time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence such as a communication failure on the entire network. Be very careful about any communication failure. If the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used on a network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure intermittently occurs in FOCAS2/Ethernet, which may cause a CNC system error. Note on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions NOTE With the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, up to 20 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be connected to one CNC. Note on using the CNC screen display functions NOTE With the CNC screen display functions, up to 1 CNC screen display function client can be connected to one CNC.
3.1
Procedure
1 2 3 4
OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN
This section describes the setting screen for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen display functions.
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
- 48 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
3.SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS

Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS Description Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server MAC address
NOTE The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" provided later.
- 49 -
3. SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS FOCAS2 screen
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting item
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) TIME INTERVAL Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen display functions, within a range of 5001 to 65535. Set 0. Set 0.
3.2
0020
I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection
[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 6 : Selects the FOCAS2/Ethernet as the input/output device. This parameter is required only for DNC operation, however.
#7 0905 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DNE
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 DNE During DNC operation using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the termination of DNC operation is: 0: Waited. 1: Not waited. (FOCAS2/HSSB compatible specification)
0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet waiting time setting
[Input type] [Data type] [Unit of data] [Valid data range]
Parameter input Word msec 0 to 32767 When the FOCAS2/Ethernet and Data Server functions are used simultaneously, this parameter sets the FOCAS2/Ethernet function waiting time in milliseconds.
- 50 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
3.SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
When a value of 0 is set, the functions operate with assuming that 1 millisecond is specified.
3.3
EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
An example of setting for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions is given below. In this example of setting, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through a FOCAS2/Ethernet.
HUB
CNC 1
CNC 2
PC 1
CNC 1 IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) TIME INTERVAL
CNC 2 The common setting screen is used for setting.
192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 None 8193 0 0 None 8193 0 0 PC 1
The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for setting.
IP address Sub-net mask Default gateway CNC 1 CNC 2 NC IP address NC TCP port number NC IP address NC TCP port number
192.168.0.200 255.255.255.0 None 192.168.0.100 8193 192.168.0.101 8193
"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is used for setting. Specify these items with the arguments of the data window library function "cnc_allclibhnd13."
- 51 -
4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
4
4.1
Procedure
1 2 3
SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION

SETTING OF DNS
This chapter describes the setting of the DNS/DHCP function.
This section describes the setting procedure for operating DNS client function.
Enable the DNS client function according to Section 4.3, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS" provided later. Set up the DNS server on the host computer. For information about setup, see Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF DNS/DHCP SETUP." Make a connection to the host computer where the DNS server operates (hereinafter referred to as the "DNS server") and restart the CNC, then press the function key .
4 5
Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B), then press [COMMON] to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. As the DNS IP address, enter the IP address of the DNS server.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys the setting items for DNS IP addresses. to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. Set
Setting item
Item DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Description Up to two DNS server IP addresses can be set. The CNC searches for a DNS server in the order from DNS IP address 1 to 2.
- 52 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
4.2
Procedure
1 2 3
SETTING OF DHCP
This section describes the setting procedure for operating DHCP client function.
Enable the DHCP client function according to Section 4.3 "RELATED NC PARAMETERS" provided later. Set up the DHCP server on the host computer. For information about setup, see Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF DNS/DHCP SETUP." Make a connection to the host computer where the DHCP server operates (hereinafter referred to as the "DHCP server") and restart the CNC, then press the function key .
4 5
Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B), then press [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen. If the DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled and a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server, the following items are set automatically from the DHCP server: IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS DNS IP ADDRESS DOMAIN If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, "DHCP ERROR" is indicated in each item. Moreover, if the DNS client function is enabled at the same time and the DHCP server interacts with the DNS server (the DNS server supports dynamic DNS), enter a desired host name.
COMMON screens (BASIC, DETAIL)

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON screens (BASIC and
DETAIL). If a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server and setting data is acquired, the following is displayed:
When a connection with the DHCP server has been made successfully
If no host name is set, the CNC automatically sets a host name in the format "NC-<MAC address>".
- 53 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
Example of host name automatically set
If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, the following is displayed:
When an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server has failed
Check item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 DOMAIN Description If a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server, data acquired from the DHCP server is displayed. If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.
Setting item
Item HOST NAME Description Enter a desired CNC host name. If the DHCP server interacts with the DNS server, this host name is posted to the DNS server. If no host name is set, "NC-<MAC address>" is automatically set. Example of host name automatically set: NC-00E0E4004CF9
Display item
- 54 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
4.3
0904
#7 #6 DHCP #5 DNS #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 DNS The DNS client function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. #6 DHC The DHCP client function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.
NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
4.4
EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP
NOTE This section provides examples of setting for Windows 2000 Server which supports dynamic DNS.
4.4.1
When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server
When a connection is made with the FTP server of the host computer (hereinafter referred to as the "FTP server") by using the Data Server function, the IP address of the CNC can be set from the DHCP server by enabling the DHCP client function of the CNC. Moreover, by enabling the DNS client function of the CNC, an FTP server can be specified with a host name instead of an IP address.
Example of specifying a connection destination with a host name (FTPServer-1)
- 55 -
4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION Setting the DNS server / DHCP server Operating system
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system.
Setting the DHCP server

In the database of the DHCP server, set the following items: Range of IP addresses to be managed by the DHCP server Subnet mask to be managed by the DHCP server IP address for DNS server Domain The DHCP server enables the function for updating the database of the DNS server. For DHCP server setting, see Section C.1, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
Setting the DNS server

The DNS server allows the DHCP server to update the database of the DNS server. For DNS server setting, see Section C.2, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."
Setting the FTP server

For FTP server setting, see Appendix B, "EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP."
Setting the CNC Parameter

To enable the DNS client function, set bit 5 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1. To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1.
4.4.2
When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data Server
The Data Server (FTP server function) can be accessed by specifying a host name from an FTP client where an FTP client operates (hereinafter referred to as an "FTP client"), using the interaction between the DHCP server and DNS server operating with Windows 2000 Server. The DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled.
Flow of operation When the system is initialized or the system configuration is modified
1 2 3 A host name is set on the CNC. When the power is turned on, the Data Server posts the host name to the DHCP server. The DHCP server assigns an IP address, and the table of correspondence between CNC host names and CNC IP addresses is updated. An FTP client inquires of the DNS server about the IP address of a CNC. The FTP client acquires the IP address of the CNC. The FTP client communicates with the FTP server of the CNC by using the IP address of the CNC.
When operation is performed from an FTP client

1 2 3
- 56 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
FTP client
The FTP client specifies a CNC by its name (CNC-1) instead of its IP address.
(4) Inquires about the IP address of CNC-1.
Windows 2000 Server

DHCP server /DNS server
(5) Returns the IP address. (6) Performs communication.
(1) Sets the name. (2) Posts CNC-1 at power-on time.
CNC-1
(3) Assigns an IP address to CNC-1.
Setting the DNS server/DHCP server Operating system

It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system. (The DNS server and DHCP server supporting dynamic DNS need to operate.)



To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1. As a host name, set a desired name. Otherwise, a name automatically set by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is used.
4.4.3
When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function
Ethernet parameters can be set with no setting performed from the CNC, using the interaction between the DHCP server and DNS server operating with Windows 2000 Server. The DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled.
Flow of operation When the system is initialized or the system configuration is modified
1 A host name is set on the CNC.
- 57 -

2 3
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
When the power is turned on, the CNC posts the host name to the DHCP server. The DHCP server assigns an IP address, and the table of correspondence between CNC host names and CNC IP addresses is updated. The user's application inquires of the DNS server about the IP address of a CNC. The user's application acquires the IP address of the CNC. The user's application communicates with the CNC by using the IP address of the CNC.
When FOCAS2/Ethernet application software is executed

1 2 3
User's application software (FOCAS2/Ethernet)

The application software specifies a CNC by its name (CNC-1) instead of its IP address.
(4) Inquires about the IP address of CNC-1.
DHCP server / DNS server
Windows 2000 Server
(5) Returns the IP address. (6) Performs communication. (2) Posts CNC-1 at power-on time.
(1) Sets the name.
CNC-1
(3) Assigns an IP address to CNC-1.
Setting the DNS server/DHCP server Operating system

It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system. (The DNS server and DHCP server supporting dynamic DNS need to operate.)



To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1. As a host name, set a desired name. Otherwise, a name automatically set by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is used.
- 58 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
When the DHCP function is enabled, the FOCAS2/Ethernet-related parameters are automatically set if bit 3 of NC parameter No. 904 is set to 0. If bit 3 of NC parameter No. 904 is set to 1, the parameters for i CELL communication are automatically set.
- 59 -
5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
5
5.1
SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the machine remote diagnosis functions. For explanation of the entire machine remote diagnosis functions, refer to "Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63734EN)."
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN
This section describes the setting screen for operating the machine remote diagnosis functions.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Press the function key . Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [REMOTE DIAG] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.

Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Description Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
- 60 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
Item
5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

Description
ROUTER IP ADDRESS
Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS Description Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server MAC address
NOTE The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4 "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION". COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys the setting items for DNS IP addresses. to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. Set
Setting item
- 61 -
5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS FOCAS2 screen
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
FOCAS2 screen
Setting item
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) TIME INTERVAL Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the machine remote diagnosis functions (FOCAS2/Ethernet functions), within a range of 5001 to 65535. Set 0. Set 0.
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON)

Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON).
Machine remote diagnosis screen (BASIC)
- 62 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
Setting item
Item MTB ID Description This information is required by the machine remote diagnosis package to confirm that the diagnosis request is issued from a machine manufactured by the machine tool builder. The MTB identification information on the diagnosis accepting server of the machine remote diagnosis package can be set to accept diagnosis requests only from the machines manufactured by the machine tool builder. (Example of specification format: "FANUC") Information required by the machine remote diagnosis package to identify the machine under diagnosis (Example of specification format: "217xxx-1011xxxxx")
MACHINE ID
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (INQUIRY1, INQUIRY2, INQUIRY3)

Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen. By using page keys , the three host computers at inquiry destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screens (INQUIRY1): Screen when the DNS function is disabled (left) and screen when the function is enabled (right)
Setting item
Item HOST NAME Description Specify the IP address of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting server) when the DNS function is disabled. (Example of specification format: "200.201.202.203") Specify the host name of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting server) when the DNS function is enabled. (You can specify up to 63 characters.) (Example of specification format: "RMTDIAG.FANUC.CO.JP") Specify a port number. Usually, specify "8194" because the machine remote diagnosis functions are used. Specify information for identifying the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting server). (You can specify up to 63 characters.) (Example of specification format: "FANUC LTD.")
PORT NUMBER INQUIRY NAME
- 63 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
5.2
0024
Setting of communication with the PMC ladder development tool
[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 10: The high-speed interface (Ethernet) is used for PMC online editing.
#7 0904 #6 #5 DNS #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 DNS The DNS function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.
NOTE 1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 2 To use the DNS function, set DNS IP ADDRESS 1 and DNS IP ADDRESS 2 on the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.
#7 0905 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 PCH #0
#7 8706 #6 MRD #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #6 MRD Type of communication device to be used by the machine remote diagnosis function: 0: The machine remote diagnosis function is not used. 1: The Fast Ethernet board is used.
NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.
- 64 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
5.3
CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC
You can use signals from the PMC to control the start and forced termination of the machine remote diagnosis functions and post the status of the machine remote diagnosis functions and error numbers to the PMC ladder.
5.3.1
No. G0141
Signals
#7 #6 #5 DIAREQ #4 DIASTP #3 #2 INQU2 #1 INQU1 #0 INQU0
DIAREQ [Name] [Classification] [Function] [Operation]
<G0141.5> Signal to request machine remote diagnosis Input signal Requests the start of machine remote diagnosis. When this signal is set to "1", it requests the start of machine remote diagnosis to the inquiry destination according to the signals indicating the number of the inquiry destination (INQU0 to INQU2). When the acceptance completion signal (RMTEND) or acceptance reject signal (RMTCAN) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0". <G0141.4> Signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation Input signal Requests the forced termination of machine remote diagnosis. When this signal is set to "1", it requests forced termination to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server. When the completion signal for machine remote signal cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0". <G0141.2> <G0141.1> <G0141.0> Inquiry number select signals Input signal Inquiry destination for which to start machine remote diagnosis Select an item from the table below as an inquiry destination for which to start machine remote signal.
INQU2 0 0 0 0 INQU1 0 0 1 1
#6 #5 #4
DIASTP [Name] [Classification] [Function] [Operation]
INQU2 INQU1 INQU0 [Name] [Classification] [Function] [Operation]
INQU0 0 1 0 1
#3 RMTCLS
Status No selection Inquiry destination 1 Inquiry destination 2 Inquiry destination 3

#2 #1 #0
No. F0082
#7
RMTCLS [Name] [Classification] [Function]
<F0082.3> Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance Output signal Notifies that a request to cancel machine remote diagnosis has been accepted.
- 65 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
[Output condition] When machine remote diagnosis is canceled after the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0".
No. F0083 #7
RMTCAN
#6
RMTEND
#5 DIAST5
#4 DIAST4
#3 DIAST3
#2 DIAST2
#1 DIAST1
#0 DIAST0
RMTCAN <F0083.7> [Name] Reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been rejected. [Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", a request to start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server. When the server rejects the request, this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0". <F0083.6> Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance Output signal Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been accepted by the machine remote diagnosis accepting server. [Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", a request to start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server. When the server accepts the request, this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0". DIAST5 <F0083.5> DIAST4 <F0083.4> DIAST3 <F0083.3> DIAST2 <F0083.2> DIAST1 <F0083.1> DIAST0 <F0083.0> [Name] Notification signals for the machine remote diagnosis status [Classification] Output signal [Function] Report the status of machine remote diagnosis. [Output condition] The status of machine remote diagnosis is reported as listed in the following table.
DIAST5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
No. F0088 #7 DIAER7
RMTEND [Name] [Classification] [Function]
DIAST4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#6 DIAER6
DIAST3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
#5 DIAER5
DIAST2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
#4 DIAER4
DIAST1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
#3 DIAER3
DIAST0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
#2 DIAER2
Description No status OPEN OPENING ACCEPTED REFUSED DIAGNOSING DIAGNOSING CLOSE FORCE CLOSING ERROR
#1 DIAER1 #0 DIAER0
DIAER7 <F0088.7>
- 66 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
DIAER6 <F0088.6> DIAER5 <F0088.5> DIAER4 <F0088.4> DIAER3 <F0088.3> DIAER2 <F0088.2> DIAER1 <F0088.1> DIAER0 <F0088.0> [Name] Notification signals for a machine remote diagnosis error number [Classification] Output signal [Function] Report an error number of machine remote diagnosis. [Output condition] These signals indicate an error number of machine remote diagnosis. The error number is 0 to 255 in binary format.
5.3.2
Signal Timing Charts
This section describes control of the start and forced termination of machine remote diagnosis according to the signals from the PMC using timing charts.
5.3.2.1
When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted
INQU0 (G141.0) INQU1 (G141.1) INQU2 (G141.2) <1> DIAREQ (G141.5) RMTEND (F083.6) The start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted. <2> <3> <4> <5>
<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0. <2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1". <3> When the machine remote diagnosis package accepts the request to start diagnosis, the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1". <4> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1", the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0". <5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "0".
- 67 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
5.3.2.2
When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected
INQU0 (G141.0) INQU1 (G141.1) INQU2 (G141.2) <1> DIAREQ (G141.5) RMTCAN (F083.7) The start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected. <2> <3> <4> <5>
<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0. <2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1". <3> When the machine remote diagnosis package rejects the request to start diagnosis, the reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1". <4> When the reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1", the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0". <5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "0".
5.3.2.3
When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated

<2> <1> <3> Machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated.
DIASTP (G141.4) RMTCLS (F082.3)
<1> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1". <2> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1", the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0". <3> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "0" and the machine remote diagnosis functions are forcibly terminated.
- 68 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
5.4
EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
An example of setting for operating the machine remote diagnosis functions is given below. In this example of setting, one personal computer functions as the machine remote diagnosis accepting server and machine remote diagnosis client and is connected to one CNC.
HUB
CNC 1
PC 1
CNC 1 IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) TIME INTERVAL MTB ID MACHINE ID INQUIRY 1 : HOST NAME INQUIRY 1 : PORT NUMBER 192.168.0.100 255.255.255.0 None 8193 0 0 FANUC 217XXX-101XXXXX 192.168.0.200 8194 PC 1 IP address Sub-net mask Default gateway Accepting server : PORT NUMBER Proxy server : PORT NUMBER MTB ID 192.168.0.200 255.255.255.0 None 8194 8193 Accepts all diagnosis requests. The common setting screen is used for setting. The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for setting.
The machine remote diagnosis screen is used for setting.
"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is used for setting. "Diagnosis accepting server setting" of the machine remote diagnosis package is used for setting.
- 69 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
6
6.1
Procedure
1 2 3 4
SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION

SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function.
This section describes the setting screen for operating the Unsolicited Messaging function.
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [UNSOLI MSG] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.

Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
- 70 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
Display item

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys the setting items for DNS IP addresses. to display the COMMON screen (DETAIL). Set
Setting item
- 71 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION FOCAS2 screen
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
FOCAS2 screen
Setting item
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) TIME INTERVAL Description Specifies the port No. to be used by the Unsolicited Messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet function), within a range of 5001 to 65535. Set 0. Set 0.
- 72 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
6.1.1
Selection of Mode
This Subsection describes how to select the mode for setting the Unsolicited Messaging function.
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] to display the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (BASIC).
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen1 (Basic)
Setting item
Item MODE Description Select the mode for setting the Unsolicited Messaging function. Refer to the next Operation for the setting method. For CNC MODE: This mode is for the setting by the CNC screen. In this case, the setting by the personal computer is impossible. Refer to Subsection 6.1.2, Setting method by CNC screen for details. For PC MODE: This mode is for the setting by the personal computer. In this case, the setting by the CNC screen is impossible. Refer to Subsection 6.1.3, Setting method by personal computer for details.
NOTE 1 When you use this function for the first time, the mode is PC MODE. 2 The change of mode is possible under only the state Not Ready. Refer to the next Display item for the state Not Ready. 3 When you change from CNC MODE to PC MODE, all setting parameters of the Unsolicited Messaging function are cleared.
Operation
The mode can be changed. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [MODE].
- 73 -

2
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
Press soft key [MODE] to display soft keys [CNC MODE] and [PC MODE].
Press soft key of the mode that you want to change.
Display item
Item IP ADDRESS Description The IP address of the connecting personal computer as a Unsolicited Messaging Server is displayed. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1") The Current status is displayed. The kind of status is the following five states. [1] Not Ready The state that data are not transmitted even if there is a data transmission request by NC program or Ladder program. [2] Ready The state that data are transmitted by a data transmission request by NC program or Ladder program. [3] Sending The state from acceptance of the request until completion of data transmission. [4] Receiving The state from completion of data transmission until receiving the response data. [5] Completed The state from receiving the response data until completion of receiving operation. <Complement> The data transmission: This means that the Unsolicited Message is transferred from the CNC to the personal computer. The response data: This means that the response of Unsolicited Message is transferred from the personal computer to the CNC.
STATUS
NOTE 1 Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart from the personal computer to change the status from Not Ready to Ready. 2 Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop from the personal computer to change the status from except for Not Ready to Not Ready. 3 Refer to Section 6.2, EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION for timing charts of status.
6.1.2
Setting Method by CNC Screen
This section describes how to set the parameters by the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen.
NOTE 1 Operate the following procedures in order to enable the parameters and start the Unsolicited Message transmission. (1) Set all setting items of the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT). (2) Press soft key [(OPRT)] -> [APPLY]. (3) Execute FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart to start Unsolicited Messaging the from the personal computer.
- 74 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
NOTE 2 The input to Setting item and the execution of soft key [(OPRT)] -> [APPLY] in the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) are possible under only the state Not Ready. Refer to Display item of Subsection 6.1.1, Selection of mode for the status Not Ready. UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT)
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] and page keys screen (CONNECT). to display the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen 2 (CONNECT)
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen 3 (CONNECT)
Setting item
Item HOST NAME Description Specify the IP address of the host computer when the DNS function is disabled. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1") Specify the host name of the host computer when the DNS function is enabled. (You can specify up to 63 characters.) (Example of specification format: "UNSOLI-SRV.FACTORY") Specify a TCP port number and a UDP port number. Usually, specify "8196". Input range: 5001 to 65535 Specify the retry count when the server does not respond to the client message. Input range: 0 to 32767 Specify the timeout (second) for the response of the transmitted data. Input range: 1 to 32767 Specify the time interval (in seconds) at which to send the alive signal during normal operation. Specify the value that is less than TIMEOUT. Input range: 1 to 32767
PORT NUMBER RETRY COUNT TIMEOUT ALIVE TIME
- 75 -

Item CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE
SETTING
Description
B-64014EN/04
CONTROL PARAMETER
CONTROL PARAMETER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3) TYPE
Specify the type of the control parameter. The control parameter is not effective when this parameter is 0. 1: PMC address (Response Notice method) 2: PMC address (Simple method) 3: Custom macro variables (Simple method) 4: Volatile RTM variables (Simple method) Specify the control parameter to execute the data transmission. In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 1: Specify a PMC address for control. The available PMC area is R and E. Two bytes are allowed from this PMC address. In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 2: Specify a PMC address for control. The available PMC area is R and E. One byte is allowed from this PMC address. In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 3: Specify a custom macro variable number for control. The available custom macro variables are the volatile common variables. One variable is allowed from this variable number. In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 4: Specify a RTM variable number for control. The available RTM variables are the volatile RTM variables. One variable is allowed from this variable number. Specify a number of the transmission data. Input range: 1 to 3 Specify the parameter of each transmission data.
PMC ADRESS, or MACRO NO.
SIZE, or NUMBER
Specify the type of the transmission data. The transmission parameters are not effective when this parameter is 0. 1 or 2: PMC address 3: Custom macro variables 4: Volatile RTM variables 5: Nonvolatile RTM variables Specify the top of area for the transmission data. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE 1 or 2: Specify a PMC address for transmission. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE 3: Specify a custom macro variable number for transmission. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE 4 or 5: Specify a RTM variable number for transmission. Specify a size of area or a number for the transmission data. The available maximum size is below. For TRANSMISSION NUMBER 1: 2890 bytes For TRANSMISSION NUMBER 2: 2874 bytes in total For TRANSMISSION NUMBER 3: 2858 bytes in total Exchange one variable for eight bytes when the macro variables (the custom macro variables or the RTM variables) are used. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE 1 or 2: Specify a size of area for the transmission data. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE 3: Specify a number of the macro variables for the transmission data. And, when the macro variable number is larger than 1000 (a system variable), specify 1 to this parameter. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE 4 or 5: Specify a number of the RTM variables for the transmission data.
- 76 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
CAUTION 1 When setting a PMC address for control and transmission, keep the following in mind. (1) For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows: <Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead. (2) The area of a PMC address for control cannot overlap each other area when other functions (FL-net, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet, and CC-Link) are used. 2 When setting a macro variable for control and transmission, keep the following in mind. (1) For a multi-path CNC, enter a macro variable as follows: <Path number>:<Variable number> For #100 for the second CNC path, for example, enter "2:100". When only a variable number (100) is entered, it is assumed to be the variable number for the first path (1:100). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead. (2) The macro variables for control cannot overlap the variables of use except for the Unsolicited Messaging function. NOTE 1 In the methods to specify a PMC address for CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE, there are the Response Notice method and the Simple method. Refer to Section 6.2, EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING for details. 2 The available range of a PMC address depends on the available PMC Memory Type. 3 The available range of a custom macro variable and a RTM variable depends on the valid option. The RTM variable means a real-time custom macro variable. No real-time custom macro variable can be used with the Series 35i-B. 4 Set the number of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3) to TRANSMISSION NUMBER. For example, when TRANSMISSION NUMBER is 3, if there are one or more non-effective value in TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3), an error occurs by pressing soft key [APPLY].
Operation
The all setting items in UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) become effective. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [APPLY].
Press soft key [APPLY].
- 77 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
6.1.3
Setting Method by Personal Computer
Create Application software by using the FOCAS2 functions if you set the parameters by the personal computer. cnc_wrunsolicprm2 Setting of the parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging (2) cnc_unsolicstart Start of the Unsolicited Messaging Refer to 5. Unsolicited Messaging Function in FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library for details
NOTE 1 Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart to start the Unsolicited Message transmission after you execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2. 2 The Execution of the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 is possible under only the state Not Ready. Refer to Display item of Subsection 6.1.1, Selection of mode for the status Not Ready. 3 The setting values set by the personal computer are displayed in the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) after the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 is executed.
6.2
EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION
This section describes how to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function. The method to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function is the following three ways In case of the Response Notice method by using a PMC address for control. In case of the Simple method by using a PMC address for control. In case of the Simple method by using a macro variable for control.
NOTE 1 When the Ladder program is used, there are the Response Notice method and the Simple method. A main difference is the followings. In the former, the response RES_CODE of the data transmission is notified to the Ladder program. In the latter, the response of the data transmission isnt notified to the Ladder program. Choose the Response Notice when you want to apply the Ladder program used by Series 16i etc. If it is not necessary to receive the response RES_CODE, it is easy to use the simple method. 2 RES_CODE is recorded in the LOG screen for the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server when 0x00 or 0x01 as RES_CODE is detected. 3 Refer to 5. Unsolicited Messaging Function in FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library for the details of RES_CODE.
- 78 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
6.2.1
When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice method)
This subsection describes how to use the Response Notice method.
NOTE Both a PMC address as the control parameter and a macro variable as the transmission parameter can be set. In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the Ladder program transmits a macro variable. The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and the transmission parameter are PMC addresses. Signals of PMC address for control
This describes the details of the signals of a PMC address for control when the Unsolicited Messaging function is used. The area of a PMC address for the control is two bytes. The following indicates the case that Rxxxx is used as a PMC address for control. Rxxxx means a PMC address that the PMC path number is omitted
No. Rxxxx #7 REQ #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
REQ [Name] [Classification] [Function] [Operation]
<Rxxxx.7> Signal to request the message transmission Input signal Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission. Set 1 to this signal after the Ladder program prepares the message. Then the message will be transmitted to the personal computer.
#7 RES #6 COM #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
No. Rxxxx+1
RES_CODE
RES [Name] [Classification] [Function] [Output condition]
<Rxxxx+1.7> Signal to notify the response of the message Output signal This signal indicates that the response of the Unsolicited Message is received. The response of the message is transmitted from the personal computer to the CNC (the communication board). When the CNC (the communication board) receives the response of the message, 1 is set to this signal. When 1 is set to this signal, the Ladder program reads out the response code (RES_CODE) and sets 0 to the signal REQ. Then the CNC (the communication board) will clear RES_CODE and this signal. <Rxxxx+1.6> Signal to notify the start of the message transmission Output signal This signal indicates that the Unsolicited Message transmission is starting. When the message transmission to the personal computer is started, 1 is set to this signal. When the message transmission is completed, 0 is set to this signal. <Rxxxx+1.0> to <Rxxxx+1.5> Indicates the response code of the message Output signal This code indicates the response code of the Unsolicited Message.
- 79 -
COM [Name] [Classification] [Function] [Output condition] RES_CODE [Name] [Classification] [Function]
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
[Output condition] The response code of the message is set. The Ladder program sets 0 to the signal REQ after reading out this code. Then this code will be cleared by CNC (the communication board).
NOTE Refer to 5. Unsolicited Messaging Function in FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library for the details of RES_CODE. Timing charts of PMC address for control
This describes the timing charts of the signals of a PMC address for control when using the Response Notice method. The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart was received, and FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending Receiving FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop] Completed Ready Not Ready
REQ (Ladder -> Board) COM (Board -> Ladder) RES (Board -> Ladder) RES_CODE (Board -> Ladder) Ladder : Ladder Program Board : Communication Board
<1>
<2> <3> <4> <5> <7> <6>
The data transmission has been finished
The response becomes available
<1> The Ladder program prepares the message and sets 1 to the signal REQ after its program confirms that the signal RES has been 0. <2> The communication board sets 1 to the COM signal because 1 is set to the signal REQ, and the message transmission is started. <3> The communication board sets 0 to the signal COM when the message transmission is completed. <4> The communication board sets the RES_CODE and sets 1 to the signal RES when the response of the message is received. <5> The Ladder program sets 0 to the signal REQ after its program read out the RES_CODE and the RES signal is 1. <6> The communication board clears the RES_CODE because 0 is set to the signal REQ. <7> The communication board sets 0 to the signal RES.
NOTE Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, Selection of mode for the details of STATUS.
- 80 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
6.2.2
When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method)
This subsection describes how to use the Simple method by a PMC address for control.
NOTE Both a PMC address as the control parameter and a macro variable as the transmission parameter can be set. In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the Ladder program transmits a macro variable. The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and the transmission parameter are PMC addresses. Signals of PMC address for control
This describes the details of the signals of a PMC address for control to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function. The area of a PMC address for the control is one byte. The following indicates the case that Rxxxx is used as a PMC address for control. Rxxxx means a PMC address that the PMC path number is omitted
No. Rxxxx #7 REQ #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
REQ [Name] [Classification] [Function] [Operation]
<Rxxxx.7> Signal to request the message transmission Input signal/Output signal Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission. Set 1 to this signal after the Ladder program prepare the message. Then the message will be transmitted to the personal computer. When the response of the message is received, this signal is cleared by CNC (the communication board).
Timing charts of PMC address for control

This describes the timing charts of the signals of a PMC address for control when using the Simple method. The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart was received, and FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] STATUS Not Ready FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop] Receiving Completed Ready Not Ready
Ready
Sending
REQ (Ladder <-> Board) Transmitting operation(Board) Receiving operation(Board)
<1>
<2> <3> <4>
<5>
Ladder : Ladder Program Board : Communication Board
The response is received
<1> The Ladder program prepares the message and sets 1 to the signal REQ after its program confirms that the signal REQ has been 0. <2> The communication board transmits the message because 1 is set to the signal REQ.
- 81 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
<3> The transmitting operation of the communication board is completed. <4> The receiving operation of the communication board is completed after the response of the message is received. <5> The communication board sets 0 to the signal REQ after the receiving operation is completed.
NOTE 1 The REQ signal is also set to 0 when transmission terminates abnormally. When it is necessary to check the transmission result, use the Response Notice method described in Subsection 6.2.1. 2 Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, Selection of mode for the details of STATUS.
6.2.3
When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method)
This subsection describes how to use the Simple method by a macro variable for control. The way to use a custom macro variable and a RTM variable in the macro variables for control is the same.
NOTE Both a macro variable as the control parameter and a PMC address as the transmission parameter can be set. In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the NC program transmits a PMC data. The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and the transmission parameter are macro variables. Macro Variables for control
This describes the details of the macro variable for control to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function. The area of the macro variable for control is one variable. The following indicates the case that #xxxx is used as a macro variable for control. #xxxx means a macro variable that the CNC path number is omitted REQ [Name] [Classification] [Function] [Operation] <#xxxx> Variable to request the message transmission Input variable/Output variable Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission. Set 1 to this variable after the NC program prepare the message. Then the message will be transmitted to the personal computer. When the response of the message received, this variable is cleared by CNC (the communication board).
NOTE The input and output value in the variable REQ is a real number. Therefore 0 and 1 indicate 0.0 and 1.0. Timing charts of macro variables for control
This describes the timing charts of the macro variable for control when using the Simple method. The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart was received, and FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
- 82 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart]

FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop] Completed Ready Not Ready
STATUS
Not Ready
Ready
Sending
Receiving
REQ (NC <-> Board)
1 0
<1>
<2> <3> <4>
<5>
Transmitting operation(Board) Receiving operation(Board)
NC : NC Program Board : Communication Board
The response is received
<1> The NC program prepares the message and sets 1 to the variable REQ after its program confirms that the variable REQ has been 0. <2> The communication board transmits the message because 1 is set to the variable REQ. <3> The transmitting operation of the communication board is completed. <4> The receiving operation of the communication board is completed after the response of the message is received. <5> The communication board sets 0 to the variable REQ after the receiving operation is completed.
NOTE 1 The REQ signal is also set to 0 when transmission terminates abnormally. When it is necessary to check the transmission result, use the Response Notice method described in Subsection 6.2.1. 2 Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, Selection of mode for the details of STATUS. Example to use macro variables for control
This describes the example to use the macro variable for control. Example [Contents] In the NC program of the CNC path number 1, the way to transmit the date and time by using macro variables is explained. [Setting] The volatile RTM variable number #0 (REQ) is used as the macro variable for control. And, the date and time (the system variable number #3011, #3012) managed in the CNC are used as the macro variable for transmission.
- 83 -

Setting item
SETTING
Setting value 4 1:0 2 3 1:3011 1 3 1:3012 1
B-64014EN/04
CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE CONTROL PARAMETER TRANSMISSION NUMBER TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1) TYPE MACRO NO. NUMBER TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.2) TYPE MACRO NO. NUMBER
[Example of the NC program] The RTM executes the next NC command of the RTM at the same time. At this time, the RTM doesn't influence the operation timing of the next NC command of the RTM. Therefore, the date and time when the NC command 2 is executed is notified.
RTM for control of the Unsolicited Messaging //1 ZDO; ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0]; #RV[0]=1; ZEND;
NC Program NC Command 1 One cycle of the machining program
<1>
Macro Call Command NC Command 2
(Reference) <1> in the example corresponds to <1> in the timing charts above.
NOTE 1 If a custom macro variable is used as the macro variable for control, be careful to influence the operation timing of the NC command. For example, if the RTM for control of the above example is replaced to a custom macro, the NC command 2 isnt executed unless the macro variable for control changes. 2 Refer to OPERATORS MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) for the details of a custom macro and a RTM.
6.3
0904
#7 #6 DHC #5 DNS #4 UNM #3 #2 #1 #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #4 UNM The CNC Unsolicited Messaging function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.
- 84 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
#5 #6
DNS The DNS function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. DHC The DHCP function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.
NOTE 1 When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 2 To use the DNS function, set DNS IP ADDRESS 1 and DNS IP ADDRESS 2 on the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.
#7 0905 #6 #5 #4 UNS #3 #2 #1 #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #4 UNS In the Unsolicited Messaging function, when the stop request of the Unsolicited Messaging function is received excluding the connecting Unsolicited Messaging server: 0: The stop request is rejected. 1: The stop request is accepted.
- 85 -
7. SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the FTP File Transfer function.
Notes on using the FTP File Transfer function CAUTION Before performing FTP communication using the Fast Ethernet for the first time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence such as a communication failure on the entire network. Be very careful about any communication failure. If the Ethernet is used on a network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure intermittently occurs in the Ethernet, which may cause a CNC system error. NOTE 1 With the FTP File Transfer function (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only one FTP server. 2 The FTP File Transfer function does not support passive mode (PASV command). 3 When setting the option (S737) of the Data Server function, the FTP File Transfer function is unavailable.
7.1
Procedure
1 2 3 4
SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
This section describes the setting screen for operating the FTP File Transfer function.
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
- 86 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
7.SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address of the Fast Data Server. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display item
NOTE The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" provided later.
- 87 -
SETTING
B-64014EN/04
FTP Trans screens (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3)

Press soft key [FTP TRANS] to display the FTP Trans screen. By using page keys set. , the three host computers at connection destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be
FTP Trans screens (for connection destination 1)
Setting item
Item HOST NAME PORT NUMBER USER NAME PASSWORD LOGIN FOLDER Description Specify the IP address of the host computer. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200") Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used. Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specify the password for the above user name. The password must always be specified. Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.) If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.
Operation
Select a connection destination. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [HOST SELECT]. Then, press soft key [HOST SELECT] to display soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3].
- 88 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
7.SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
Press one of soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] according to the host computer to which you want to make a connection. The screen title of connection destination 1, 2 or 3 is displayed in reverse video. The screen title displayed in reverse video indicates the connection destination host computer.
When connection destination 1 is selected
7.2
0020
The NC parameters related to the FTP File Transfer function are described below.
I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection
[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 5 : Selects the FTP File transfer function as the input/output device.
#7 0901 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 EFT #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 EFT The FTP file transfer function by the Fast Ethernet board is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.
NOTE 1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 2 This parameter is valid only for Path 1. 3 If Data Server function is valid, FTP File Transfer function cannot be used.
#7 0905 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 PCH #0
- 89 -

0921 0922 0923
SETTING
Selects the host computer 1 OS. Selects the host computer 2 OS. Selects the host computer 3 OS.
B-64014EN/04
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 2 0: Windows95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7. 1: UNIX/VMS. 2: Linux.
NOTE Some FTP server software may not depend on the OS. Therefore, the valid file list may not be displayed by the above setting.
- 90 -
B-64014EN/04
SETTING
8.ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING
ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING
This chapter explains the error messages that are issued when Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server parameters are set.
Messages Communication Software is not found Ethernet board is not found Software Version Error DATA IS OUT OF RANGE Wrong Character(s) Format Error too many figures Data was rejected Reading from SRAM failed Writing into SRAM failed DHCP is available
Meaning and action to be taken Check whether the communication software is installed. Check whether the Ethernet board is installed. The communication software version is illegal. Check the software version. A numeric parameter value is beyond the range. An illegal character is used in a character parameter. Input data such as an IP address has an illegal input format. A value input in a numeric parameter consists of too many digits. A parameter error is found. Confirm the setting conditions described in the relevant manual. SRAM may have been destroyed. SRAM may have been destroyed. When the DHCP function is enabled, it is impossible to input parameters manually from the setting screen. To input parameters manually, disable the DHCP function. Other errors. Report the displayed message.
Error(xxxx)
- 91 -
IV. OPERATION
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes how to operate the Data Server functions. On the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, files on the CNC memory, memory card, host computer connected via the embedded Ethernet, memory card built into the Fast Data Server, or host computer connected via the Fast Data Server can be handled by selecting a device. Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B
CNC memory
Memory card
Via embedded Ethernet
File list
FAST Data Server PROGRAM FOLDER screen Memory card

Via FAST Data Server
File list
In this chapter, the method of handling files on the memory card built into the Fast Data Server and on the host computer connected via the Fast Data Server is described.
1.1
Procedure
1 2
DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN

Press the function key .
Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
- 95 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS OPERATION
B-64014EN/04
Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] to display the soft keys for selectable devices.
4 5
When you press soft key [DTSVR], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen is changed to the contents (DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen) of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server to enable file operation. When you press soft key [DTSVR HOST], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen is changed to the contents (DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen) of the hard disk of the host computer to enable file operation.
1.2
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN
If [DTSVR] is selected to change the device on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, the contents (DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen) of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server are displayed to enable file operation. The information displayed on the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen partly changes, depending on the setting of bit 1 (PDM) of NC parameter No. 3233. When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0, an M198 operation folder and DNC operation file can be set. When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 1, foreground/background folders can be set.
- 96 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen / When PDM=0 (No.3233#1=0)
DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen / When PDM=1 (No.3233#1=1)
Display item M198 OPE FOLDER

Displays a folder (directory) for M198-based subprogram calling. This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.
- 97 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS OPERATION DNC OPE FILE
B-64014EN/04
Displays a file name used when DNC operation is performed. This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.
FOREGROUND FOLDER / BACKGROUND FOLDER

Displays foreground/background folders (directories). This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 1.
CONNECT HOST
Displays the work folder and the number of the host currently connected.
USED PAGE / FREE PAGE

Displays the size used of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server and the size that is free.
USED FILES / FREE FILES

Displays the total number of folders (files) in use of the Data Server and the number of remaining free folders (files).
DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the memory card built into the Fast Data Server is selected, "DATA_SV" is indicated.
CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the current work folder.
File list
Displays information about the files and folders in the current work folder.
Operation list DEVICE CHANGE

Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the memory card built into the Fast Data Server, press soft key [DTSVR].
DNC SET
Specifies a file for DNC operation. This soft key can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.
M198 SET
Specifies a folder for M198-based subprogram calling. This soft key can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.
FORE CHANGE / BACK CHNAGE

Specifies a foreground/background folder. These soft keys can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 1.
MAIN PROGRM
Selects a file as a main program.
DETAIL OFF / DETAIL ON

Switches the file list information to overall display or detail display.
- 98 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
CREATE FOLDER
Creates a sub-folder under the current work folder.
DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.
RENAME
Renames a file or folder.
SELECT START
Selects multiple files.
COPY
Copies a file or files.
MOVE
Moves a file or files from one folder to another.
SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current work folder.
PUT
Transfers a file from the Data Server to the host computer.
MPUT
Transfers multiple files from the Data Server to the host computer.
LIST-PUT
Transfers multiple files from the Data Server to the host computer according to a list file.
LIST-DELETE
Deletes multiple files from the Data Server according to a list file.
READ (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A) F INPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Inputs an NC program in the host computer to part program storage of the CNC. This soft key is enabled only when the Data Server is in the storage mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to 5.
PUNCH (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A) F OUTPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Outputs an NC program in part program storage of the CNC to the host computer. This soft key is enabled only when the Data Server is in the storage mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to 5.
REFRESH
Updates the display information of the PROGRAM FOLDER screen.
- 99 -
B-64014EN/04
NOTE The operations of soft keys [CREATE FOLDER], [DELETE], [RENAME], [COPY], [MOVE], and [LIST-DELETE] are the target operations of the memory protection key. This means that when the memory protection key is enabled, these operations result in a "WRITE PROTECT" error and cannot be performed. For information about the memory protection key, refer to the CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) of the CNC.
1.2.1
Displaying and Operating the File List
REFRESH, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON

The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed. 1 2 3 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list. Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name, size, and date. Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file list with file attributes and comments. A comment statement immediately following the O number of a file is displayed. When there is no comment statement, the contents starting with the beginning of the file are displayed.
NOTE 1 For a file selected as a main program and a file being used for memory operation, no comment is displayed in detail display mode. 2 The file attribute of a binary file is displayed as "R/B" to the right of the comment. MOVE FOLDER
A work folder can be moved. 1 2 By using cursor keys Press the MDI key . , select a folder to be moved.
CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created. 1 2 3 Move to a new folder to be created. Enter a desired folder name. Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
NOTE 1 Up to six levels of folders can be created. 2 No duplicate folder name is allowed within the same folder. 3 Each time a folder is created, the number of programs that can be registered decreases by one. 4 No folder may be able to be created, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state.
- 100 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
DELETE Specifying a file or folder

A file or folder can be deleted. 1 2 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be deleted.
Press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE 1 The initial folder cannot be deleted. 2 A folder can be deleted only when the folder is empty. (An empty folder means a folder that does not contain any folder and file.) 3 Files or folders may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. Specifying multiple files
Multiple files can be deleted at a time. 1 2 3 4 Press soft key [SELECT START]. By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted. Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted. Press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE 1 No folder can be specified. 2 Files may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 3 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time. DELETE (new specification) Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted. 1 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted. Press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted. 1 2 Press soft key [SELECT]. Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
- 101 -

3 4 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.
B-64014EN/04
A selected file is displayed in reverse video. When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting individual files or folders

Multiple files or folders can be deleted. 1 2 3 4 Press soft key [SELECT]. Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected. When you have selected desired files, press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE 1 Delete operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B. 2 The initial folder cannot be deleted. 3 Folders can also be specified and deleted only when the folders are empty. (An empty folder means a folder that does not contain any folder and file.) 4 Files or folders may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time. RENAME
A file or folder can be renamed. 1 2 3 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.
Key a new file name or folder name. Press soft key [RENAME].
NOTE 1 The initial folder cannot be renamed. 2 No duplicate folder name is allowed within the same folder. 3 Files and folders may not be able to be renamed, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found. 1 2 Enter a desired file name. Press soft key [SEARCH].
- 102 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
COPY Only one file

A file can be copied within the same folder. 1 2 3 4 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. By using cursor keys , select a copy source file. Key the name of a copy destination file. Press soft key [COPY].
NOTE 1 Copy operation is impossible if the same file name is specified as a copy source file and copy destination file. 2 No folder can be specified. 3 Files may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. Selecting individual files or folders
Multiple files can be copied. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Press soft key [SELECT START]. By using cursor keys , select a copy source file. Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be copied. Press soft key [SELECT END]. Move to a copy destination folder. Press soft key [COPY].
NOTE 1 Copy operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a copy source folder and copy destination folder. 2 No folder can be specified. 3 Files may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 4 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time. COPY (new specification) Only one file
One file can be copied. 1 2 3 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [COPY]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Move to a copy destination folder. Press soft key [PASTE]. To rename and copy the file, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer and press soft key [PASTE].
- 103 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS OPERATION Selecting a range

Multiple files can be copied. 1 2 3 4 5 6
B-64014EN/04
Press soft key [SELECT]. Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [RANGE SELECT]. By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be copied. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [COPY]. Move to a copy destination folder. Press soft key [PASTE].

Multiple files can be copied. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press soft key [SELECT]. Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected. When you have selected desired files, press soft key [COPY]. Move to a copy destination folder. Press soft key [PASTE].
NOTE 1 Copy operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B. 2 With copy operation of the new specification, not only a file or files, but also a folder or folders can be selected. In this case, all files in the selected folder(s) are copied. 3 Copy operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a copy source folder and copy destination folder. 4 Files or folders may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time. MOVE
A file or files can be moved. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Press soft key [SELECT START]. By using cursor keys , select a move source file. Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be moved. Press soft key [SELECT END]. Move to a move destination folder. Press soft key [MOVE].
- 104 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
NOTE 1 Move operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a move source folder and move destination folder. 2 No folder can be specified. 3 Files may not be able to be moved, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 4 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time. MOVE (new specification) Only one file
One file can be moved. 1 2 3 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [CUT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Move to a move destination folder. Press soft key [PASTE]. To rename and move the file, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer and press soft key [PASTE].
Selecting a range
Multiple files can be moved. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press soft key [SELECT]. Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [RANGE SELECTT]. By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be moved. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [CUT]. Move to a move destination folder. Press soft key [PASTE].

Multiple files can be moved. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press soft key [SELECT]. Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [SELECTT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected. When you have selected desired files, press soft key [CUT]. Move to a move destination folder. Press soft key [PASTE].
NOTE 1 Move operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B. 2 With move operation of the new specification, not only a file or files, but also a folder or folders can be selected. In this case, all files in the selected folder(s) are moved. 3 Move operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a move source folder and move destination folder.
- 105 -
B-64014EN/04
NOTE 4 Files or folders may not be able to be moved, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time. LIST-DELETE
By using a list file, multiple files in the Data Server can be deleted. 1 2 By using cursor keys , select a list file.
Press soft key [LIST-DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
When execution is selected, the files in the Data Server are deleted according to the list file.
NOTE Files cannot sometimes be deleted depending on the operation status and protection status.
1.2.2
File Transfer Operation
Files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer.
NOTE If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item, ETHERNET LOG screen in Section 2.1, ETHERNET LOG in Part VI, MAINTENANCE. PUT
A file can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer. 1 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.
Press soft key [PUT]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation. When a file is to be transferred to the host computer under a different file name, enter the desired transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [PUT].
MPUT
Multiple files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer. 1 2 Enter the names of files to be transferred. Specify the names of files using wildcards (*, ?). Press soft key [MPUT]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
- 106 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
LIST-PUT
Multiple files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer according to a list file. 1 2 By using cursor keys , select a list file.
Press soft key [LIST-PUT]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation. When execution is selected, the files are transferred from the Data Server to the host computer according to the list file.
1.2.3
Preparations for File Operation and Editing
MAIN PROGRM
A selected file can be registered as a main program. 1 2 3 Select the EDIT mode or MEM mode. By using cursor keys , select a file to be registered as a main program. Press soft key [MAIN PROGRM].
A registered main program can be executed in memory operation or edited.
NOTE 1 No file may be able to be selected, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 2 Only a text file can be selected as a main program. 3 For a file selected as a main program and a file being used for memory operation, no comment is displayed in detail display mode. 4 For a file selected as a main program, other file operations are disabled. 5 For memory operation and editing, refer to the OPERATORS MANUAL of the CNC. M198 SET
A folder for M198-based subprogram calling can be specified. 1 2 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling. Press soft key [M198 SET].
NOTE 1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the storage mode. 3 The specified folder name is stored and can be used without specifying it at the next power-on.
- 107 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS OPERATION DNC SET

A file used for DNC operation can be selected. 1 2 3 Move to the folder containing a file to be used for DNC operation. By using cursor keys Press soft key [DNC SET]. , select a file to be used for DNC operation.
B-64014EN/04
NOTE 1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the storage mode. 3 The specified file name is not stored. Accordingly, specify a file again after turning the power off, then on again. FORE CHANGE / BACK CHANGE
A foreground/background folder can be specified. 1 2 Move to the folder containing a foreground/background file. Press soft key [FORE CHANGE] or [BACK CHANGE].
1.3
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN
Host computer files can be operated on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.
DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen
- 108 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
NOTE A file name containing a 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may not be displayed correctly. Display item M198 OPE FOLDER
Displays a folder (directory) for M198-based subprogram calling.
DNC OPE FILE

Displays a file name used when DNC operation is performed.
DT SERVER FOLDER
Displays the work folder (directory) of the Data Server (memory card).
CONNECT HOST
Displays the number of the host computer currently connected.
DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the host file list of the Data Server is selected, "DTSVR_HOST" is indicated.
CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the work folder in the current host computer.
FILE LIST
Displays information about the files and folders in the host computer.
Operation list DEVICE CHANGE

Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the host file list of the Data Server, press soft key [DTSVR HOST].
DNC SET
Specifies a file for DNC operation.
M198 SET
Specifies a folder for M198-based subprogram calling.

CREATE FOLDER
DELETE
RENAME
- 109 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS OPERATION HOST CHANGE

Changes the connected host computer.
B-64014EN/04
SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current folder.
GET
Transfers a file from the host computer to the Data Server.
MGET
Transfers files from the host computer to the Data Server by specifying a file name with wildcards (*, ?).
BGET
Transfers a file from the host computer to the Data Server in binary format. Use this soft key to transfer a binary-format NC program or data other than an NC program such as NC parameter or tool data.
LIST-GET
Transfers multiple files from the host computer to the Data Server according to a list file.
Inputs an NC program in the host computer to part program storage of the CNC. This soft key is enabled only when the Data Server is in the FTP mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to 5.
Outputs an NC program in part program storage of the CNC to the host computer. This soft key is enabled only when the Data Server is in the FTP mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to 5.
REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.
NOTE The operations of soft keys [GET], [MGET], [BGET], and [LIST-GET] are the target operations of the memory protection key. This means that when the memory protection key is enabled, these operations result in a "WRITE PROTECT" error and cannot be performed. For information about the memory protection key, refer to the CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63943EN-1) of the CNC.
1.3.1
RENAME, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON

The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed. 1 2 3 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list. Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name only. Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file attribute, size, date, and file name.
- 110 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
NOTE 1 The information displayed with soft key [DETAIL ON] depends on the setting of the FTP server on the host computer. 2 When a file operation is performed in the detail display mode, the rightmost information displayed on the screen is handled as the file name. For this reason, the file operation may not be performed correctly depending on the displayed information or file name. In this case, set the overall display mode and perform the file operation. MOVE FOLDER
CREATE FOLDER

Specifying multiple files

Multiple files or folder can be deleted. 1 2 3 4 Press soft key [SELECT START]. By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted. Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted. Press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
- 111 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS OPERATION DELETE (new specification) Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted. 1 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted. Press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
B-64014EN/04
Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted. 1 2 3 4 Press soft key [SELECT]. Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT]. By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE 1 Delete operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B. 2 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time. RENAME
SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found. 1 2 Enter a desired file name. Press soft key [SEARCH],
- 112 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
HOST CHANGE
The connected host computer can be changed. 1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE]. The connected host number changes in the order 1 2 3 1.
1.3.2
File Transfer Operation
Files can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.
NOTE If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item, ETHERNET LOG screen in Section 2.1, ETHERNET LOG in Part VI, MAINTENANCE. GET
An NC program can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server. 1 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.
Press soft key [GET]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation. When a file is to be transferred to the Data Server under a different file name, enter the desired transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [GET].
NOTE 1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and protection status. 2 Use this operation only for text format NC programs. MGET
Multiple NC programs can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server. 1 2 Enter the names of files to be transferred. Specify the names of files using wildcards (*, ?). Press soft key [MGET]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE 1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and protection status. 2 Use this operation only for text format NC programs.
- 113 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS OPERATION BGET

A file can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server. 1 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.
B-64014EN/04
Press soft key [BGET]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation. When a file is to be transferred to the Data Server under a different file name, enter the desired transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [BGET].
NOTE 1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and protection status. 2 When transferring binary format NC programs and NC data such as tool offset data, be sure to use the binary format. LIST-GET
Multiple files can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server according to a list file. 1 2 By using cursor keys , select a list file.
Press soft key [LIST-GET]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
When execution is selected, the files are transferred from the host computer to the Data Server according to the list file.
NOTE Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and protection status.
1.3.3
M198 OPE
Preparations for File Operation
A folder for M198-based subprogram calling can be specified. 1 2 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling. Press soft key [M198 SET].
NOTE 1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the FTP mode or buffer mode. 3 The specified folder name is stored and can be used without specifying it at the next power-on.
- 114 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
DNC OPE
A file used for DNC operation can be selected. 1 2 3 Move to the folder containing a file to be used for DNC operation. By using cursor keys Press soft key [DNC SET]. , select a file to be used for DNC operation.
NOTE 1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state. 2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the FTP mode or buffer mode. 3 The specified file name is not stored. Accordingly, specify a file again after turning the power off, then on again.
1.4
M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL
If the Data Server is placed in the storage mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an NC program in the Data Server. If the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an NC program in the host computer. If the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an NC program of the buffer mode format in the host computer.
NOTE 1 An M198-based subprogram call cannot be executed simultaneously with NC program input, NC program output, and DNC operation. 2 In an M198-based subprogram call, no additional M198-baesd subprogram call can be made. 3 M198-based subprogram calls do not allow use of file names. Use a program number to make an M198-based call. Subprogram call in the storage mode
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Check that the Data Server is placed in the storage mode. Set the CNC to the MEM mode. Display the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set. Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.
Subprogram call in the FTP mode
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Check that the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode. Set the CNC to the MEM mode. Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set. Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.
- 115 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS OPERATION Subprogram call in the buffer mode
B-64014EN/04
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Check that the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode. Set the CNC to the MEM mode. Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set. Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.
1.5
DNC OPERATION
If the Data Server is placed in the storage mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program in the Data Server. If the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program in the host computer. If the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program of the buffer mode format in the host computer.
NOTE A DNC operation cannot be executed simultaneously with NC program input, NC program output, and M198-based subprogram call. DNC operation in the storage mode
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Check that the Data Server is placed in the storage mode. Set the CNC to the RMT mode. Display the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set. Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.
DNC operation in the FTP mode
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Check that the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode. Set the CNC to the RMT mode. Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set. Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.
DNC operation in the buffer mode
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Check that the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode. Set the CNC to the RMT mode. Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set. Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.
1.6
NC PROGRAM INPUT
When the Data Server mode is the storage mode, NC programs on the Data Server can be input to part program storage of the CNC. When the Data Server mode is the FTP mode, NC programs on the host computer can be input to part program storage of the CNC. When the Data Server mode is the buffer mode, buffer mode format NC programs on the host computer can be input to part program storage of the CNC.
- 116 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
CAUTION If bit 2 of NC parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in part program storage, the existing NC program is overwritten. NOTE NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output, M198-based subprogram call, and DNC operation.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Display the PROGRAM screen or PROGRAM FOLDER screen. Press soft key [READ] ([F INPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B). In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be input on the Data Server, and press soft key [F SET]. When the file name on the Data Server is not set, file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" is used by default. To rename the input file and input it into part program storage, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer, and press soft key [P SET]. Press soft key [EXEC]. During inputting, "INPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
NOTE In the buffer mode, a file specified with soft key [F SET] is treated as a file list. Therefore, NC program input processing is performed on the assumption that files defined in the file list are a continuous file image.
1.7
NC PROGRAM OUTPUT
When the Data Server mode is the storage mode or buffer mode, NC programs in part program storage of the CNC can be output to the Data Server. When the Data Server mode is the FTP mode, NC programs in part program storage of the CNC can be output to the host computer.
NOTE NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input, M198-based subprogram call, and DNC operation.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Display the PROGRAM screen or PROGRAM FOLDER screen. Press soft key [PUNCH] ([F OUTPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B). In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be output in part program storage, and press soft key [P SET]. When a specific file name in part program storage is not set, all files in the foreground folder are assumed to be output.
- 117 -

5
B-64014EN/04
6 7
To rename the output file and output it to the Data Server, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer, and press soft key [F SET]. When only a file in part program storage is specified, but no file name on the Data Server is specified, a file is created with the file name used in part program storage. Press soft key [EXEC]. During outputting, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
NOTE 1 When neither file in part program storage nor file name on the Data Server is specified, all files in the foreground folder are output with file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" to the Data Server. 2 When an NC program is output in the storage mode or buffer mode, if a file with the same name is already present on the memory card of the Data Server, an error occurs.
1.8
FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS
The FTP server functions allow communication with FTP clients on the host computer.
NOTE 1 Up to five FTP clients can be connected to the FTP server. Some FTP client software products may attempt to internally connect the FTP server as two or more FTP clients, however. For this reason, the number of FTP clients actually connected may differ from that of FTP client applications that can be connected. If the DataServer Explorer connection is enabled, one CNC can connect up to ten FTP clients. For the DataServer Explorer connection, see Section 3.7, "DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION," in Part II, "SPECIFICATION." 2 On the memory card on the Data Server, text files and binary files are distinguished from each other. You can specify text (ASCII) or binary (image) when transferring a file from the FTP client to use the file as a text or binary file. The file attribute can be fixed to text or binary regardless of which is specified from the FTP client according to the setting of NC parameter No. 929. For details, see Section 2.2, RELATED NC PARAMETERS in Part III, SETTING. 3 The creation date and time of a folder are not managed in the Data Server. For this reason, the creation date and time of a folder in folder information obtained from a personal computer are January 1, 2000. 4 Since the file size is managed in units of 500 bytes on the memory card on the Data Server, the file size in units of 500 bytes can be obtained from a personal computer.
- 118 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
2.OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
2
2.1
Procedure
1 2 3
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SCREEN
This chapter describes how to operate the machine remote diagnosis functions.
Soft key [REMOTE DIAG] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the machine remote diagnosis screen.
Machine remote diagnosis screen
Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display available soft keys.
Display item INQUIRY NUMBER

Displays the inquiry number indicating the machine remote diagnosis accepting server: "INQUIRY1," "INQUIRY2," or "INQUIRY3."
INQUIRY
Displays information for identifying the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
RMT DIAG STATUS

Displays the status of machine remote diagnosis.
RMT DIAG TIME

Displays the time until the machine remote diagnosis status changes from "OPEN" to "CLOSE," "FORCE CLOSING," or "ERROR."
- 119 -
2. OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
OPERATION
B-64014EN/04
At each start of diagnosis, the time is accumulated from "00:00:00."
RECEIPT NUMBER
Displays the receipt number issued by the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
ERROR NUMBER
Displays the number of an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis functions.
AVAILABLE DEVICE
Displays the type of communication device for which the machine remote diagnosis functions can operate.
ERROR MESSAGE
Displays the message indicating an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis functions.
Operation list DIAG OPEN

Starts machine remote diagnosis.
DIAG CLOSE
Forcibly terminates machine remote diagnosis.
INQUIRY1
Selects inquiry destination 1.
INQUIRY2
INQUIRY3
2.1.1
1 2 3
Selecting an Inquiry Destination
Select an inquiry destination among inquiry destinations 1 to 3. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Press soft key [INQUIRY1] to select inquiry destination 1. Similarly, press soft key [INQUIRY2] to select inquiry destination 2 and soft key [INQUIRY3] to select inquiry destination 3.
2.1.2
1 2
Starting Diagnosis
Start diagnosis. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Press soft key [DIAG OPEN] to start diagnosis.
2.1.2.1
Diagnosis status
Status --OPEN OPENING Description No operation [DIAG OPEN] was pressed. An attempt is being made to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
- 120 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
Status ACCEPTED REFUSED
2.OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

Description
DIAGNOSING CLOSE FORCE CLOSING ERROR
The machine remote diagnosis accepting server accepted diagnosis. The machine remote diagnosis accepting server rejected diagnosis. This message flashes in synchronization with data flowing on the communication line. The machine remote diagnosis accepting server terminated diagnosis. [DIAG CLOSE] was pressed. After the completion of forced termination processing, "---" is indicated in the RMT DIAG STATUS field. An error occurred on the communication line.
2.1.2.2
Number 1 2
Error numbers and error messages

Error message Diagnosis is busy Router isnt alive Meaning and action to be taken [DIAG OPEN] was pressed during diagnosis. The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power to the router is on. The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be invalid or the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may not be operating. Check whether the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is valid and whether the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is operating. A system error occurred. Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC. A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the inquiry destination. Check whether the correct inquiry destination is set. Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format. A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the port number. Check whether the correct port number is set. Set the IP address of the router according to the IP address specification format. A communication error occurred due to a cause as listed below. Check the network wiring and anti-noise measures. The network quality degraded, data could not be received from the personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical communication path was disconnected. The software component on the personal computer with which to communicate forcibly disconnected the logical communication path. The Ethernet cable was disconnected. An internal error related to machine remote diagnosis occurred in the CNC. Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC. An unrecognizable packet was received. Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC. [DIAG CLOSE] was pressed not during diagnosis. An attempt to receive data failed. See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures. Communication with the machine remote diagnosis accepting server stopped. See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures. An attempt was failed to send a heartbeat packet for machine remote diagnosis. See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
Receipt Server isnt alive
4 5 6 7 8
System error Invalid Inquiry number. Invalid IP Address Invalid PORT number Invalid Router IP Address
Socket error
11 12 13 17 19 20
Invalid Request Invalid Packet Diagnosis was already stopped Receive error HeartBeat timeout HeartBeat error
- 121 -
2. OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS

Number Error message
OPERATION
Meaning and action to be taken
B-64014EN/04
22
DNS error
An attempt was failed to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting server using the DNS function. The IP address of the DNS server may be invalid or the power to the DNS server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is valid and whether the power to the DNS server is on.
2.1.3
1 2
Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis
Forcibly terminate diagnosis. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Press soft key [DIAG CLOSE] to forcibly terminate diagnosis.
- 122 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
This chapter describes how to operate the FTP File Transfer function. On the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, files on the CNC memory, memory card, host computer connected via the embedded Ethernet or host computer connected via the Fast Ethernet board can be handled by selecting a device.
Series 30 i - A
CNC memory
Memory card
Via embedded Ethernet
File list
Without Me mory Card
FAST Ethernet Board
Via FAST Ethernet Board
File list
In this manual, the method of handling files on the host computer connected via the Fast Ethernet board is described.
NOTE The FTP file transfer function cannot perform an M198-based subprogram call or DNC operation. To perform it, use the Data Server functions.
- 123 -
3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
OPERATION
B-64014EN/04
3.1
Procedure
1 2
DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN

Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] to display the soft keys for selectable devices.
When you press soft key [FTP HOST], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen is changed to the contents (FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen) of the hard disk of the host computer to enable file operation.
- 124 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
3.2
OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN
Host computer files can be operated on the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen.
FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen
NOTE A file name containing a 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may not be displayed correctly. Display item CONNECT HOST
Displays the number of the host computer currently connected.
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of programs in the current folder.
DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the host file list of the Fast Ethernet board is selected, "FTP_HOST" is indicated.
CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the work folder in the current host computer.
FILE LIST
Displays information about the files and folders in the host computer.
- 125 -
3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION Operation list DEVICE CHANGE
OPERATION
B-64014EN/04
Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the host file list of the Fast Ethernet board, press soft key [FTP HOST].

CREATE FOLDER
DELETE
RENAME
HOST CHANGE
Changes the connected host computer.
SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current folder.
When the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode and CNC parameter No.20 is equal 5, it is possible to input NC programs in the host computer to program memory of the CNC.
When the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode and CNC parameter No.20 is equal 5, it is possible to output NC programs in program memory of the CNC to the host computer.
REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen.
3.2.1
RENAME, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON

The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed. 1 2 3 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list. Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name only. Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file attribute, size, date, and file name.
NOTE 1 The information displayed with soft key [DETAIL ON] depends on the setting of the FTP server on the host computer.
- 126 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
NOTE 2 When a file operation is performed in the detail display mode, the rightmost information displayed on the screen is handled as the file name. For this reason, the file operation may not be performed correctly depending on the displayed information or file name. In this case, set the overall display mode and perform the file operation. MOVE FOLDER
CREATE FOLDER

Specifying multiple files

Multiple files or folder can be deleted. 1 2 3 4 Press soft key [SELECT START]. By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted. Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted. Press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
NOTE Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
- 127 -
3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION DELETE (new specification) Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted. 1 2
OPERATION
B-64014EN/04
Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted. Press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted. 1 2 3 4 Press soft key [SELECT]. Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT]. By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE]. Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE 1 Delete operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B. 2 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time. RENAME
SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found. 1 2 Enter a desired file name. Press soft key [SEARCH],
- 128 -
B-64014EN/04
OPERATION
HOST CHANGE
The connected host computer can be changed. 1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE]. The connected host number changes in the order 1 2 3 1.
3.3
NC PROGRAM INPUT
NC programs in the host computer can be input to program memory of the CNC.
CAUTION If bit 2 of NC parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in program memory, the existing NC program is overwritten. NOTE NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Display the PROGRAM screen, PROGRAM FOLDER screen or FTP TRANSFER HOST LIST screen. Press soft key [READ] ([F INPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B). In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be input on the host computer, and press soft key [F SET]. When the file name on the host computer is not set, file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" is used by default. To rename the input file and input it into program memory, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer, and press soft key [P SET]. Press soft key [EXEC]. During inputting, "INPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
3.4
NC PROGRAM OUTPUT
NC programs in program memory of the CNC can be output to the host computer.
NOTE NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input.
Procedure
1 2 3 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Display the PROGRAM screen, PROGRAM FOLDER screen or FTP TRANSFER HOST LIST screen. Press soft key [PUNCH] ([F OUTPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
- 129 -
3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

4
OPERATION
B-64014EN/04
6 7
In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be output in program memory, and press soft key [P SET]. When a specific file name in program memory is not set, all files in the foreground folder are assumed to be output. To rename the output file and output it to the host computer, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer, and press soft key [F SET]. When only a file in program memory is specified, but no file name on the host computer is specified, a file is created with the file name used in program memory. Press soft key [EXEC]. During outputting, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
NOTE When neither file in program memory nor file name on the host computer is specified, all files in the foreground folder are output with file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" to the host computer.
- 130 -
V. CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
1.SETTING
1
1.1
1.1.1
SETTING
Series 30i/31i/32i-A
Specifications
A02B-0303-J146 A20B-8101-0030 Series 30i/31i/32i-A
This chapter provides information required to install the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
Ordering information of optional board Drawing number of printed circuit board Applicable models
NOTE 1 When using the optional board, observe the installation condition (environmental condition inside the cabinet) of the CNC control unit where the board is installed. 2 Even if a control unit is installed in the environment described above, the contents on the memory card may be destroyed as a result of a operation mistake or unexpected event. This tends to happen if the power is turned off while accessing the memory card. An accident can occur. So, ensure that the data on the memory card is backed up at all times.
The table below indicates the amount of heat output by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. For the amount of heat output by the main CNC unit and other optional units, refer to the CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) of the CNC.
Name Fast Ethernet board only Memory card Total Fast Ethernet 6W 6W Fast Data Server 6W 0.3 W (Note) 6.3 W
NOTE The amount of heat output by the memory card may vary, depending on the employment of a large-capacity card, a modification to the card specifications, and so forth.
1.1.2
1.1.2.1
Installation
This section provides information relating to the installation of the Fast Ethernet and Fast Data Server.
Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit
The optional board is installed in an optional slot of the control unit. It occupies one slot. No restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.
- 133 -
1.SETTING
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
Optional board
NOTE 1 When using the Data Server functions, install a memory card in CNH6 before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional slot, the memory card cannot be installed/removed. 2 Use the memory card recommended by FANUC.
1.1.2.2
Installation on a stand-alone type unit
The optional board is installed in the optional slot of the control unit. One slot is occupied. No restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.
NOTE 1 When using the Data Server functions, install a memory card in CNH6 before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional slot, the memory card cannot be installed/removed. 2 Use the memory card recommended by FANUC.
- 134 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
1.SETTING
1.1.2.3
Total connection diagram

Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server
CNH6
Memory card
CD38R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RXTX+ TXRX+ HUB
1.1.2.4
Installing a memory card
The following shows the specifications of memory cards recommended as an external storage device of the Fast Data Server.
Specification A02B-0281-K601 A02B-0213-K211 A02B-0213-K212 A02B-0213-K213 A02B-0213-K214 Capacity 128MB 256MB 1GB 2GB 4GB Remarks Compact Flash card Compact Flash card Compact Flash card Compact Flash card Compact Flash card
For adapters that convert data on the above Compact Flash cards to that for an ATA card, the operation of the following adapters has been confirmed: FANUC adapter A02B-0236-K150 and Sandisk adapters SDCF-31-03 and SDAD-38-J60.
NOTE 1 Use a FANUC-recommended memory card for the Data Server. Follow the instructions described in Note for using this card supplied with a memory card. 2 For latest information, refer to the Technical Report provided separately.
- 135 -
1.SETTING Installing a memory card

1
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
Remove the screws of (1) and (2) for securing the stopper plate.
(1)
(3)
(2)
Remove the stopper plate, then insert the memory card into the connector.
MEMORY
Secure the memory card with the stopper plate and tighten the screws of (1) and (2) for securing the stopper plate.
(4)
MEMORY
Card
Card
(5)
- 136 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
1.SETTING
1.2
1.2.1
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Specifications
In case of using the Ethernet function, specify the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type CNC) or the Fast Ethernet board. In case of using the Data Server function, specify the Fast Ethernet board.
Ordering information of optional board Drawing number of printed circuit board Applicable models A02B-0323-J147 A20B-8101-0770 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
NOTE 1 Refer to the order list of each CNC, for ordering information for Multi-function Ethernet. 2 When using the optional board, observe the installation condition (environmental condition inside the cabinet) of the CNC control unit where the board is installed. 3 Even if a control unit is installed in the environment described above, the contents on the Compact Flash card may be destroyed as a result of a operation mistake or unexpected event. This tends to happen if the power is turned off while accessing the Compact Flash card. An accident can occur. So, ensure that the data on the Compact Flash card is backed up at all times.
The table below indicates the amount of heat output by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. For the amount of heat output by the main CNC unit and other optional units, refer to the CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) of the CNC.
Name Fast Ethernet board only Compact Flash card Total Fast Ethernet 3W 3W Fast Data Server 3W 0.3W (Note 2) 3.3W
NOTE 1 For the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD mounted type CNC), refer to the CONNECTION MANUAL of the CNC. 2 The amount of heat output by the Compact Flash card may vary, depending on the employment of a large-capacity card, a modification to the card specifications, and so forth.
- 137 -
1.SETTING
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
1.2.2
1.2.2.1
Installation Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit
For the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet, the Fast Ethernet and Fast Data Server are installed on the main board.
Rear of unit
Multi-function Ethernet
The optional board is installed in an optional slot of the control unit. It occupies one slot. No restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.
Optional board
NOTE 1 When using the Data Server functions, install a Compact Flash card in CD58 before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional slot, the Compact Flash card cannot be installed/removed. 2 For the Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B, directly install a Compact Flash card. It is not necessary to use an adapter which converts data for that for an ATA card (A02B-0236-K150). 3 Use the Compact Flash card recommended by FANUC.
- 138 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
1.SETTING
1.2.2.2
Installation on a stand-alone type unit
The optional board is installed in the optional slot of the control unit. One slot is occupied. No restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.
NOTE 1 When using the Data Server functions, install a Compact Flash card in CD58 before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional slot, the Compact Flash card cannot be installed/removed. 2 For the Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B, directly install a Compact Flash card. It is not necessary to use an adapter which converts data for that for an ATA card (A02B-0236-K150). 3 Use the Compact Flash card recommended by FANUC.
- 139 -
1.SETTING
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
1.2.2.3
Total connection diagram
Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server
CD58
Compact Flash card
CD38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RXTX+ TXRX+ HUB
1.2.2.4
Installing a memory card
The following shows the specifications of memory cards recommended as an external storage device of the Fast Data Server.
Specification A02B-0281-K601 A02B-0213-K211 A02B-0213-K212 A02B-0213-K213 A02B-0213-K214 Capacity 128MB 256MB 1GB 2GB 4GB Remarks Compact Flash card Compact Flash card Compact Flash card Compact Flash card Compact Flash card
NOTE 1 Use a FANUC-recommended memory card for the Data Server. Follow the instructions described in Note for using this card supplied with a memory card. 2 For latest information, refer to the Technical Report provided separately.
- 140 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
1.SETTING
Installing a Compact Flash card

1 Remove the cover (put up the tip of cover), as shown below.
CD58
Insert the Compact Flash card to CD58.
CD58
The cover is matched to the guide and set on. As a result, the Compact Flash card is fixed.
Compact Flash card

CD58 Guide Guide
- 141 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
CABLE CONNECTION
CAUTION 1 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable to or from the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, make sure that the power to the CNC is turned off. 2 Please inquire of each manufacturer about the construction of network or the condition of using the equipment except the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server (hub, transceiver, cable etc.). When configuring your network, you must take other sources of electrical noise into consideration to prevent your network from being influenced by electrical noise. Make sure that network wiring is sufficiently separated from power lines and other sources of electrical noise such as motors, and ground each of the devices as necessary. Also, a high and insufficient ground impedance may cause interference during communications. After installing the machine, conduct a communications test before you actually start operating the machine. We cannot ensure operation that is influenced by network trouble caused by a device other than the Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server.
This section describes information relating to the physical Ethernet connection.
2.1
CONNECTING TO Ethernet
The Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server is provided with a 100BASE-TX interface. Prepare a hub for connecting the Fast Ethernet board to the Ethernet trunk. The following shows an example of a general connection. Some devices (hub, transceiver, etc.) that are needed for building a network do not come in a dust-proof construction. Using such devices in an atmosphere where they are subjected to dust or oil mist will interfere with communications or damage the Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server. Be sure to install such devices in a dust-proof cabinet.
- 142 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
2.CABLE CONNECTION
HUB
Twisted pair cable
: : :
CNC Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server
Max. 100m
NOTE 1 The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary. 2 An Ethernet cable needs clamping to make system operation stable. For details of clamping, see Subsection 2.5.2, Cable Clamp and Shield Processing. The clamp for grounding the shield of the cable can also fix the cable.
Control unit
Ethernet cable
Clamp
Grounding plate
3 Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network are not dust-proof. They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet. Using them in an atmosphere with dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure.
- 143 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
2.2
LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE
(1) LCD-mounted type Select the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet or optional board. For the location of the connector, see Subsection 1.1.1 or 1.2.1, Component Layout, in Part VI, MAINTENANCE.
Optional board (CD38R)
Twisted-pair cable The radius of the cable must be 70 mm or more. Clamp
Ground plate
Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (CD38B)
(2) Stand-alone type Select the optional board. For the location of the connector, see Subsection 1.1.1 or 1.2.1, Component Layout, in Part VI, MAINTENANCE.
The radius of the cable must be 70 mm or more.
Twisted-pair cable
Clamp Ground plate
2.3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS

Pin No. Signal name TX+ TXRX+ Send + Send Receive + Not used Not used Receive Not used Not used Description
RX-
- 144 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
2.CABLE CONNECTION
2.4
2.4.1
TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION

Cable Connection
The cable used for connection between the 100BASE-TX interface, CD38R, of the Ethernet board/Data Server board and the hub is connected as follows:
Ethernet board / Data Server board CD38 1 TX+ 2 TX3 RX+ 4 5 6 RX7 8
HUB
RJ-45 modular connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+
RX-
MAX.100m
TX+ TXRX+ RX-
(1) (2) (3) (6)
(1) (2) (3) (6)
TX+ TXRX+ RX-
Shielded cable
Keep the total cable length within 100 m. Do not extend the cable more than is necessary. The figure above shows the cable connection when cables are crossed in the hub. "X" is usually indicated at the port of the hub to signify that cables are crossed in the hub.
Ethernet board / Data Server board 1 TX+ 2 TX3 RX+ 6 RXHUB X TX+ 1 TX- 2 RX+ 3 RX- 6 Cross-connected cables
2.4.2
Cable Materials
CAUTION Unshielded cable (UTP cable) is commercially available as 100BASE-TX twisted-pair cable: You should, however, use shielded Category 5 twisted-pair cable (STP cable) to improve the resistance to electrical noise in an FA environment.
Recommended cables
Manufacturer FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Specification DTS5087C-4P Remarks Twisted-pair cable
- 145 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION
Manufacturer NISSEI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
CONNECTION
Specification F-4PFWMF
B-64014EN/04
Remarks Single-conductor cable
Inquiries
Manufacturer Contact address FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 2-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku. Tokyo 100-8322 Sales Headquarters TEL: 03-3286-3126 FAX: 03-3286-3979 Remarks NISSEI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 3F MU Bldg., 1-9-1 Minami-narise, Machida Branch Machida City, Tokyo 194-0045 TEL: 0427-29-2531 FAX: 0427-29-3375 Overseas Sales Office IWATANI International Corporation Tokyo Head Office 21-8 Nishi-shinbashi 3-chome, Minato-ku, TOKYO, 105-8458, JAPAN TEL: 03-5405-5810 FAX: 03-5405-5666 Telex: 2524256 IWATYO J A finished cable with connectors at both ends can be offered.
Remarks
NOTE The above recommended cables cannot be connected to moving parts.

Recommended cable (for movable parts)
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Shinko Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Specification AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) FNC-118 Remarks Dedicated to FANUC
Specification Electric characteristics: Conforms to EIA/TIA 568A Category 3 and Category 5. From the viewpoint of attenuation performance, ensure that the length to the hub is 50 m or less. Structure: Group shielded (braided shield). A drain wire is available. The conductor is an AWG26 annealed copper twisted wire, with a sheath thickness of 0.8 mm and an outer diameter of 6.7 mm 0.3 mm. Fire retardancy UL1581 VW-1 Oil resistance Conforms to the FANUC internal standards (equivalent to the conventional oil-resistant electric cables). Flexing resistance: 1,000,000 times or more with a bending radius of 50 mm (U-shaped flex test) UL style No. AWM 20276 (80C/30V/VW-1)
NOTE Be sure to use the connector TM21CP-88P(03) manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. for this cable.
- 146 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
2.CABLE CONNECTION
Contact address
Inquiries
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Remarks Shinko Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Remarks Nagano Sales Office TEL:0266-27-1597 Tokyo Sales Office TEL:03-3492-0073
Cable assembly Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can also supply the cable assembly mentioned above. Contact Oki Electric directly to determine the specifications (length, factory test, packing, and so forth) for purchase.
2.4.3
Connector Specification
Use an 8-pin modular connector (RJ-45) with the twisted-pair cable for the Ethernet connection. The following connectors or equivalents must be used.
For general use Solid wire Solid wire Twisted-pair cable Twisted-pair cable Specification 5-569530-3 MS8-RSZT-EMC 5-569552-3 TM11AP-88P Manufacturer Tyco Electronics AMP K.K.. SK KOHKI CO., LTD. Tyco Electronics AMP K.K.. HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Manufacturer HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Special tools required Special tools required Remarks Note Remarks
For movable parts For cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) or FNC-118
Specification TM21CP-88P(03)
NOTE Information about TM21CP-88P(03): Connector (standard product of the manufacturer) Drawing number: A63L-0001-0823#P Manufacturer: HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Manufacturer type number: TM21CP-88P(03) Conforms to EIA/TIA 568A Category 3 and Category 5. For assembly with a cable, contact HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. directly. (From HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD., "TM21CP-88P(03) Connection Procedure Manual (Technical Specification No. ATAD-E2367)" is available as a technical document.)
- 147 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
2.5
2.5.1
ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES

Separating Signal Lines
For signal line separation, refer to the description of noise protection in the Connection Manual (Hardware) of CNC. The wiring for the Ethernet cable is of group C.
2.5.2
Clamping and Shielding Cables
Clamp an Ethernet twisted pair cable according to the method described below, as with cables that need to be shielded. Clamping cables provides support and shielding and is extremely important to the safe operation of the system. Never overlook cable clamping. Peel off part of the jacket as shown in the figure to expose the outer coating of the shield, and press this outer coating against the ground plate with the clamp fixture. The machine manufacturer must prepare the ground plate and install it as follows:
Ground plate Cable
Cable clamp Ground plate
Shield Peel off jacket
NOTE To ensure the safe operation of the system, clamp and shield the cables.
Connect the Ethernet board and hub with a twisted-pair cable. Shield the cable with clamp fixtures. This shielding is extremely important to the stable operation of the system. Be sure to shield the cable. Shield both ends of each cable at locations as nearest to the CNC and hub connectors as possible. When the CNC and hub are contained in the same power magnetics cabinet and the cable is short, shield the cable only at the hub side.
- 148 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
2.CABLE CONNECTION
Power magnetics cabinet Control unit
Power magnetics cabinet Control unit
Twisted-pair cable
HUB
Shielding
Example of shielding of transceiver cable (When LCD-mounted type Series 30i-A)
Prepare the following earth plate.
Mounting screw hole Ground terminal (used for grounding)
Clamp fixture mounting hole
Use a nickel-plated iron plate at least 2 mm thick as the ground plate.

8mm Ground plate
12mm
20mm
Details of clamp fixture mounting holes
- 149 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
55mm max.
28mm
6mm
17mm
External dimensions of clamp fixture
2.5.3
Grounding the Network
Even if the grounding condition on the machine side is satisfied, the communication line can pick up noise from the machine, depending on the machine installation condition and environment, thus resulting in a communication error. To protect against such noise, the machine should be separated and insulated from the Ethernet trunk cable and personal computer. Examples of connection are given below.
Personal computer Switching HUB Note 2 Note 1 Hub power supply Note 2 Personal computer / HUB side Electrically separated by 100BASE-TX cable connection Machine system Note 1 Ethernet Machine Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Machine Note 1 Note 1 Machine HUB Note 2 HUB
STP cable
STP cable
Large-Scale Network
- 150 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
Personal computer
2.CABLE CONNECTION
Hub power supply Note 2 HUB Note 1 Personal computer/Ethernet trunk side Electrically separated by 100BASE-TX cable connection Machine system Ethernet Note 1 Machine Note 1 Note 1
STP cable
Small-Scale Network
NOTE 1 The ground between PC/HUB side and machine system side must be separated. If it is impossible to separate the ground because there is only one grounding point, connect the ground cable for each system to the grounding point independently. (See figure below.) The resistance for grounding must be less than 100-ohm (Class D). The thickness of the ground cable is the same as the thickness of AC power cable or more. At least thickness of 5.5mm2 is necessary. 2 Note that the number of allowable hub-to-hub connections depends on the type of hub. 3 There is possibility that noise makes the obstacle of communication even if the ground is separated using the 100BASE-TX. In the case of using the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server under the worst environment, please separate between the PC/Trunk line side and machine system side completely using the 100BASE-FX (Optical fiber media).
- 151 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION
CONNECTION
B-64014EN/04
FG
Note 2
HUB
Ground wire on personal computer and trunk sides
Ground wire on machine system Machine
Ground wire on machine system

Ground point
Wiring on a single ground point
2.6
CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION
The following table lists check items at installation.

Check item Description Check
Ethernet cable Type Use cables which satisfies all the following conditions: 1) With shielding 2) Twisted-pair cable 3) Category 5 The cable length shall be within 100 m (50 m for a movable cable recommended by FANUC). For a twisted-pair cable, the following pins shall be paired: 1) Pin No. 1 (TX+) pin No. 2 (TX-) 2) Pin No. 3 (RX+) pin No. 6 (RX-) The Ethernet cables shall be bound separately from the following cables or covered with an electromagnetic shield: 1) Group A: AC power lines, power lines for motors, and others 2) Group B: Current DC (24 VDC) and others For a shielded cable, the part of which outer coating is peeled off and exposed shall be fixed to the ground plate with a clamp fixture. The ground plate shall be located as nearest to the CNC as possible (to make the cable between the ground plate and CNC hard to be affected by noise). Any cable connector shall not be pulled (to prevent poor contact of the connector). No cable shall be laid under a heavy object. The bending radius shall be at least four times as long as the diameter of the cable. For a movable part, a cable for a movable part shall be used.
Length Connection
Separation
Shielding Clamping Connectors Wiring Bending radius For part movable
- 152 -
B-64014EN/04
CONNECTION
Description
2.CABLE CONNECTION
Check
Check item
CNC and cabinet CNC grounding Ground plate Mounting HUB Use conditions Grounding Cabinet Vibration Bending radius The "cautions on use" of the hub shall be observed (A terminating resistor shall be mounted properly if required). The hub shall be grounded. The hub shall be installed in an enclosed cabinet. The hub shall be installed so that it is not affected by vibration. The bending radius shall be at least four times as long as the diameter of the cable. The CNC ground (frame ground) shall be connected properly and the length of the ground wire shall be within 300 mm. The ground plate shall be connected to the AC ground of the cabinet with wire. The optional board shall be inserted in a CNC slot properly.
- 153 -
VI. MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
1
1.1
1.1.1
HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Series 30i/31i/32i-A
Component Layout
This chapter provides hardware maintenance information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
LSI
MPU
CNH6
CD38R
Name Fast Ethernet board / Fast Data Server board
PCB drawing No. A20B-8101-0030
Remarks
- 157 -
1. HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
1.1.2
LED Indications and Meanings
The optional board provides four green LEDs (STATUS) and one red LED (ALARM) for status indication, and provides three green LEDs and one red LED for communication status indication. The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states. In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows: : Off : On : Blinking : Don't care
CD38R
COM (YELLOW) LIL (GREEN) COL (RED) ALR (RED) BTX (GREEN) 4(STASUS) (GREEN) 3(STATUS) (GREEN) 2(STATUS) (GREEN) 1(STATUS) (GREEN)
NOTE The face plate is indicated using dotted lines.
LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during power-on)
LED display
L4 L3 L2 L1
Status Power-off
Meaning Initial state entered immediately after power-on. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: The software is not stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC. The optional board is defective. The optional board has started. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the optional board may be defective. The software has been downloaded to the optional board. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the optional board may be defective. The software OS has started. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: The software stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC is destroyed. The optional board is defective.
Immediately after power-on
Start of optional board Completion of software downloading
Firmware OS started.
- 158 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
Status

Meaning
LED display
L4 L3 L2 L1
Completion of software OS initialization
Completion of parameter reading Start completion
Initialization of the software OS is completed. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: The software stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC is destroyed. The optional board is defective. The Ethernet parameters have been read. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: The Ethernet option or Data Server option is not installed. The IP address or subnet mask is not set. The optional board has started normally.
LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal operation)
LED display
L4 L3 L2 L1
Status Normal status
Meaning The board is operating normally.
LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED display BTX BTX LIL COM ALM Status 100BASE-TX connection in progress 10BASE-T connection in progress Connected to hub Transmission/ reception in progress No alarm Meaning The communication rate is 100BASE-TX. The communication rate is 10BASE-T. The board is connected to the hub. Data is being transmitted or received. No alarm is issued
LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long on-time and short on-time.
LED display
[Long on-time]
LED display
[Short on-time]
Status
Description A defect on another board or a problem on another optional board was detected. Software has a problem, or the optional board is defective. The optional board is defective. Software has a problem, or the optional board is defective. Software has a problem, or the optional board is defective. Software has a problem, or the optional board is defective.
4321
4321 Error on another board Bus error Parity alarm Illegal general instruction Illegal slot instruction CPU address error
NOTE If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off with long on-time and short on-time in a manner not indicated above, contact FANUC.
- 159 -
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED display COL COL Status Collision occurs. (Data collision occurs.) Description The LED is on or blinks at short intervals when the Ethernet communication traffic (communication amount) is high or ambient noise is high. The board is not connected to the hub properly. The LIL LED stays off also when the power to the hub is off. Check whether the board is connected to the hub properly. A parity error occurred in memory on the optional board. The optional board is defective.
LIL
Not connected to hub
ALM
Parity error occurs.
1.2
1.2.1
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
Component Layout
Optional board (common to LCD-mounted type/Stand-alone type)
CD58
CD38R
Name
PCB drawing No.
Remarks
Fast Ethernet board
A20B-8101-0770
- 160 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type)
Rear of unit
CD38B
1.2.2
LED Indications and Meanings
The board provides one green LED (STATUSF) and one yellow LED (LCOM) for status indication, and two red LEDs (HER, COL). The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting state.
Optional board (common to LCD-mounted type/Stand-alone type)
CD38R
HER (red) LCOM (yellow) STATUSF (green) COL (red)
NOTE The face plate is indicated using dotted lines.
- 161 -
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type)
Rear of unit
Ethernet (Multi-function Ethernet)
StatusLED STATUSF LCOM HER

COL
(red) (yellow) (green) (red)
- 162 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows: : Off : On : Blinking
LED display transition for STATUSF (during power-on)

LED display Status Meaning
Power-off Immediately after power-on Initial state entered immediately after power-on. If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: The CNC communication software may not be running normally. Check whether the communication software is installed properly. The hardware may be faulty. Replace the optional board (main board when Multi-function Ethernet is used). The board has started normally.
Start completion
LED display for STATUSF (during normal operation)

Normal status
The board is operating normally.
LED display for LCOM

Not connected to hub
The board is not connected to the hub properly. The LED stays off also when the power to the hub is off. Check whether the board is connected to the hub properly. The board is connected to the hub. Data is being transmitted or received.
Connected to hub Transmission/reception in progress
LED display for COL

Normal status Collision occurs. (Data collision occurs.)
The board is operating normally. The LED is on or blinks at short intervals when the Ethernet communication traffic (communication amount) is high or ambient noise is high.
LED display for HER

Normal status
The board is operating normally.
Error detected in the Ethernet The cause may be the faulty optional board (main board when circuit on the main board or option Multi-function Ethernet is used) or a malfunction due to noise. board. Error detected in the software
- 163 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
2
2.1
SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Ethernet LOG
This chapter provides software maintenance information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
A log related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is displayed.
ETHERNET LOG screen
Procedure
1 2 Press the function key . Press soft key [BOARD LOG] ([ETHER LOG] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) to display the LOG screen for the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)
LOG screen
The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format "MMM.DD hh:mm:ss", where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss represents seconds. The top item in the example above indicates "09:36:14 on August 7". To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].
By operating the LOG screen of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, log information can be displayed for each function.
- 164 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
(1) Soft key [ALL] This soft key displays all log information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. (2) Soft key [COMMON] This soft key displays log information related to the parameter setting and basic communication function of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. (3) Soft key [FOCAS2] This soft key displays log information related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. (4) Soft key [DATA SERVER] This soft key displays log information related to the Data Server. (5) Soft key [REMOTE DIAG] This soft key displays log information related to the machine remote diagnosis functions.
NOTE The Ethernet log information is stored in volatile memory and is lost when the power to the CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.
Error number Log message Meaning and action to be taken
E-0118 E-0119
Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 pdu
E-011A E-0126
All communication paths are busy No response from RMT DIAG server
E-012D
No response from router
A communication error occurred due to one of the following causes: The network quality degraded, data could not be received from the personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical communication path was disconnected. The software component on the personal computer with which to communicate forcibly disconnected the logical communication path. The Ethernet cable was disconnected. All FOCAS2/Ethernet communication paths are being used. The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be invalid or the power to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is valid and whether the power to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is on. Alternatively, the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may not respond to the PING command to increase the security level (such as a firewall setting). Set bit 1 of CNC parameter No. 905 to "1" and connect the server again. The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power to the router is on.
- 165 -

Error number Log message
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
E-0148
Cannot save parameter for Unsolicited Message
E-0149
The received parameter for Unsolicited Message is wrong
E-0200
(Received message from FTP server)
E-0202
Connection failed with FTP server
E-0207
The router is not found
E-0208
The FTP server is not found
E-020B E-020C E-020D E-0219 E-021A E-021B E-021F
Cannot login into FTP server The parameters of FTP server are wrong Changing a work folder of host failed The DNC file is not found The specified file is not found Opening a file failed FTP transfer is busy on BUFFER mode
E-0220 E-0221
There is no file in list file The specified file already exists
When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 is received, the save of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function failed due to one of the following causes: The mode of the Unsolicited Messaging function isnt PC MODE. The status of the Unsolicited Messaging function isnt Not Ready. The wrong value exists in the argument the parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging of the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2. When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2, cnc_rdunsolicprm2 or cnc_unsolicstart is received, it is detected that the argument the parameter number of the Unsolicited Messaging is wrong. A message sent from the FTP server is displayed as is. A message containing kanji, hiragana, and/or katakana characters may not be displayed correctly. The FTP server software may not be running. Run the FTP server software. Alternatively, the setting may be made so that the FTP server cannot be connected to increase the security level (such as a firewall setting). Change the firewall setting so that the FTP server can be connected. The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power to the router is on. The IP address of the FTP server may be invalid or the power to the FTP server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the FTP server is valid and whether the power to the FTP server is on. Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the PING command to increase the security level (such as a firewall setting). Set bit 1 of CNC parameter No. 905 to "1" and connect the server again. Check the user name and password for logging in to the FTP server. Check the user name and password for logging in to the FTP server. Check the work folder for logging in to the FTP server. Check whether the file for DNC operation is specified correctly. Check whether the specified file is present. The file could not be opened. Check the error code in parentheses. FTP communication could not catch up with data supply. Correct the file division size. Alternatively, set bit 0 of NC parameter No. 0904 to 1. No file is defined in the list in the buffer mode. Correct the file list. The specified file is already present on the memory card of the Data Server. Delete the existing file. Alternatively, change the file name.
- 166 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
Log message

Error number
E-0223 E-023A
Writing data to the file failed The specified file is busy
E-0252 E-02F0 E-02F3
Contents of ATA card are broken ATA card is not found ATA card is not mounted
E-041A
Frame transmission failed (TCP)
E-0A02
Cannot read MAC address
E-0A06 E-0B00 E-0B01 E-0B02 E-0B03 E-0B04 E-0B05 E-0B06 E-0B07 E-0B08 E-0B09 E-0B0B E-0B0C E-0B0D E-0B0E E-0B0F E-0B10 E-0B11 E-0B12
Network is too busy The own IP address is wrong The own IP address is not set Subnet mask is wrong Subnet mask is not set Router IP address is wrong IP address of DNS server is wrong The own host name is wrong The own domain name is wrong TCP port number is wrong UDP port number is wrong IP address of remote FTP server is wrong Port number of a remote FTP server is wrong User name of remote FTP server is wrong Password of remote FTP server is wrong Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong Port number of own FTP server is wrong User name of own FTP server is wrong Password of own FTP server is wrong
Data could not be written to the memory card of the Data Server. Check the error code in parentheses. The file on the memory card of the Data Server is currently used. When a file on the memory card is selected as a main program, the file is regarded as being used. Format the memory card of the Data Server. Check whether a memory card is installed in the Data Server. Check whether the memory card of the Data Server is destroyed and whether the memory card has been formatted. A communication error occurred due to one of the following causes: The network quality degraded, data could not be received from the personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical communication path was disconnected. The software component on the personal computer with which to communicate forcibly disconnected the logical communication path. The Ethernet cable was disconnected. Data cannot be posted to the communication destination due to a firewall setting. The MAC address may not be written on the Fast Ethernet board or Fast Data Server board or the board may be damaged. An excessive amount of data flows over the network. Take action such as dividing the network. Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format. Set the IP address. Set the subnet mask according to the subnet mask specification format. Set the subnet mask. There may be a conflict between the classes of the local node and router IP addresses. There may be a conflict between the classes of the local node and DNS server IP addresses. Check the host name setting. Check the domain name setting. A value outside the valid setting range may be set. A value outside the valid setting range may be set. Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format. A value outside the valid setting range may be set. A character unavailable for a user name may be used. A character unavailable for a password may be used. A character unavailable for a login folder name may be used. A value outside the valid setting range may be set. A character unavailable for a user name may be used. A character unavailable for a password may be used.
- 167 -

Error number Log message
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
E-0B13 E-0B14
Login folder of own FTP server is wrong IP address of Remote Diag is wrong
E-0B15 E-0B18 E-0B27
Port number of Remote Diag is wrong Cannot set because DHCP is available Unsolicited Message isn't available
E-0B29 E-0B2A
Mode of Unsolicited Message is wrong Status of Unsolicited Message is wrong
E-0B2B
Cannot refresh param of Unsolicited Message
E-0B44
Invalid value exists in Transmission parameter of Unsolicited Message The total of Transmission size of Unsolicited Message exceeds the limitation
E-0B45
E-XXXX
(No message)
A character unavailable for a login folder name may be used. Set the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server according to the IP address specification format. A value outside the valid setting range may be set. To set the item, disable the DHCP client function. The software conditions to use the Unsolicited Messaging function are not satisfied. Refer to Chapter 6, UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION in Part II, SPECIFICATION. The FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 can't be execute in CNC MODE. The application of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function failed because the status of the Unsolicited Messaging function is not Not Ready. This error occurred due to one of the following causes when the status is not Not Ready: The FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2, or cnc_unsolicstart is executed. The soft key [APPLY] is pressed. The application of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function failed due to one of the following causes: The problem of E-0B29 or E-0B2A occurred. The invalid value exists in the parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function. The non-effective value exists in TRANSMISSION NUMBER or TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3). The total transmission size of the parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function exceeds the available maximum size. Refer to Subsection 6.1.2, Setting by CNC screen in Part III, SETTING for the available maximum size. Internal error. Report the error number.
The meaning of the error codes indicated in error messages E-02XX are as follows:
Error code Meaning
2 10 11 12 14 15 19 22 28 36 37 39 48
The available space of the memory card of the Data Server is insufficient. The specified folder cannot be found. The allowable number of entries is exceeded. Access to a folder was rejected. The specified file cannot be found. Access to a file was rejected. An attempt was made to access a file being used. The specified file name is illegal. A TV check error was detected. The specified file is already present. The folder is not empty. The specified folder is already present. The available file size is exceeded.
- 168 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
2.2
ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION
By transmitting the PING command, the CNC can check that a connection is made with the communication destination.
PING screen (connection state confirmation)
Procedure
1 2 3 Press the function key . Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [PING].
PING (CONNECT STATE) screen
Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING FTP1] to send the PING command to host 1 to which the Data Server function is connected. Similarly, press soft key [PING FTP2] and soft key [PING FTP3] to send the PING command to connection hosts 2 and 3, respectively.
Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING RMT1] to send the PING command to inquiry destination 1 of the machine remote diagnosis functions. Similarly, press soft key [PING RMT2] to send the command to inquiry destination 2 and soft key [PING RMT3] to inquiry destination 3.
- 169 -
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
The results of PING execution are as follows:
Execution results of PING
PING (SETTING) screen
Procedure
1 When sending the PING command to a desired destination, enter the destination address in HOSTNAME (IP ADDRESS) on the PING (SETTING) screen. Moreover, set a desired execution repeat value in REPEAT.
PING (SETTING) screen
2 3
After entering a host name (IP address) and repeat value, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING EXEC] to send the PING command to the specified destination. To cancel the transmission of the PING command halfway, press soft key [PING CANCEL].
- 170 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
2.3
COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION
The communication state of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server detected by hardware can be checked.
COM STATE (SEND / RECEIVE) screen
Procedure
1 2 3 Press the function key . Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [COM STATE] to display the COM STATE screen.
COM STATE screen
Display item
Display item
BAUDRATE
SEND PACKET SEND RETRYOVER COLLISION CARRIER SENSE LOST NO CARRIER FRAME LENGTH ERROR RECEIVE PACKET CRC ERROR SHORT FRAME LONG FRAME ODD FRAME OVERFLOW PHY-LSI ERROR
Description Displays the communication rate and mode. Communication rate: 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps Communication mode: Full duplex or Half duplex -------- : Not connected to HUB (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) Displays the number of sent packets. Displays the number of errors detected during packet sending.
Displays the number of received packets. Displays the number of errors detected during packet reception.
- 171 -
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
2.4
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION
The operating status of the software of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server can be checked.
TASK STATE screen
Procedure
1 2 3 Press the function key . Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [TASK STATE] to display the TASK STATE screen.
TASK STATE screen
Display item
The meaning of each symbol is indicated below.
Symbol and meaning Function that can be checked
COMMON
FOCAS2 #0
FOCAS2 #1
FOCAS2 #2
SCREEN
W D E C W D N W D X W D X W D X
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
Data being processed (1) Data being processed (2) Start of software Waiting for connection from the host Data being processed (1) Data being processed (2) FOCAS2 incapable of being executed Data being processed (1) Data being processed (2) Not executed yet Data being processed (1) Data being processed (2) Not executed yet Data being processed (1) Data being processed (2) Not executed yet
Operation status of the basic function Operation status of the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions
Operation status of the CNC screen display functions
- 172 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
Symbol and meaning

Function that can be checked
UDP
PMC
DATASERVER
FTP SERVER
REMOTE DIAG
UNSOLICITED
FTP
W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) Number : Number of sockets currently connected W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) N : Abnormal state X : Not executed yet Number : The existence signals is being transmitted during this number is being counted. W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet
Operation status of the UDP broad cast Operation status of the FANUC LADDER-III function Operation status of the Data Server functions
Operation status of the machine remote diagnosis functions Operation status of the unsolicited messaging function
Operation status of the FTP file transfer function
2.5
FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE
The state of FTP clients connected to the FTP server can be checked and the FTP connection can be disconnected forcedly.
NOTE To use this function, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is required. FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST, CLIENT DETAIL)
Procedure
1 2 3 Press the function key . Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [FTP SERVER] to display the FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST).
- 173 -
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)
By using cursor keys
, select a client, and press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key
[DETAIL] to display the FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT DETAIL) displaying the client information on the cursor.
The CLIENT DETAIL screen is as follows:
FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT DETAIL)
Press soft key [LIST] to display the CLIENT LIST screen again.
- 174 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
Display item
Item Description
CLIENT
CONNECT TIME
Displays the IP address of the FTP client connected to the FTP server. (Example of display format: "192.168.0.200") In the CLIENT DETAIL screen: When the FTP connection is disconnected, "Disconnected" is displayed. Display the connect time of the FTP client connected to the FTP server. The format of the time is "hh:mm:ss" (hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second). The time display is updated automatically. In the CLIENT DETAIL screen: When the FTP connection is disconnected, "--:--:--" is displayed.
NOTE 1 The CLIENT DETAIL screen cannot be displayed when any client does not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen. 2 There is not the CLIENT DETAIL screen for 15-inch display unit.
Operation (DISCONNECT)
The selected client is disconnected on the CLIENT LIST screen and the CLIENT DETAIL screen. 1 2 When the CLIENT LIST screen is displayed, by using cursor keys disconnected. Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DISCONNECT]. , select a client to be
Press soft key [EXEC] to disconnect the selected client. When the CLIENT DETAIL screen is displayed, the displaying client is disconnected.
NOTE An error occurs if the disconnect operation is attempted to execute when any client does not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen, or when the connection with the client is already disconnected on the CLIENT DETAIL screen.
Operation (ALL DISCONNECT)

All clients are disconnected on the CLIENT LIST screen. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [ALL DISCON].
Press soft key [EXEC] to disconnect all clients.
NOTE 1 This operation can be executed only on the CLIENT LIST screen. 2 An error occurs if this operation is attempted to execute when any client does not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen.
- 175 -
MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/04
2.6
ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
NOTE This function is valid only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B.

When using the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server on the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following alarms might be displayed. In this case, please confirm the diagnosis information and take the countermeasure.
Number Message Description
PW0050 (NOTE) SR2038
POWER MUST BE OFF (INITIALIZED COMMUNICATION) WRONG COMMUNICATION COMBINATION
When the power was turned on, communication hardware was initialized. Please turn the power off. The combination of the communication hardware and the software options is illegal. Details of an illegal combination are notified to diagnosis number No.4400 and 4401.
NOTE An alarm PW0050 might be generated when the power is turned on after the option boards are added or are exchanged and the software option is changed.
#7 Diagnosis 4400 #6 #5 BD4 #4 BD3 #3 BD2 #2 BD1 #1 #0 MFE
#0 #2 #3 #4 #5
MFE BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4
When the communication alarm SR2038 occurs, the detail information of wrong hardware is indicated. Multi-function Ethernet Option board mounted in slot1 Option board mounted in slot2 Option board mounted in slot3 Option board mounted in slot4
NOTE When the communication alarm SR2038 does not occur, all bits are "0".
Diagnosis 4401 Detailed number of alarm SR2038
When the communication alarm SR2038 occurs, the information is indicated.

Number Description
0 1 2 3
The combination of the communication functions is correct. The number of mounted the hardware option exceeds limitation. The number of the hardware options that can be mounted is up to three. The hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates doesn't exist. Confirm the hardware option specified for NC parameter No.970-972. In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, the working function is not specified. NC parameters No.970-972 are wrong though the hardware option exists. Specify "-1" for No.970-972 When not using it. In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, the Data Server function and the FL-net function are specified at the same time. Specify a separate hardware option for NC parameter No.970, No.971 or 972 because the Data Server function and the FL-net function are exclusive functions.
- 176 -
B-64014EN/04
MAINTENANCE
Number

Description
In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, a necessary software option is not effective. The same hardware option is specified for NC parameter No.970, No.971 or No.972. In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, a necessary software option is not effective.
2.7
COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION
When the Fast Ethernet function on the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B is used, Fast Ethernet communication errors are checked at intervals of 10 seconds. If the number of errors detected during the last 1 minute reaches the value set for parameter No. 11533, warning signal WETF is output. Since the number of detected errors is checked at intervals of 10 seconds, the warning signal is also output at intervals of 10 seconds. The signal output is reset by turning the power off, then on again.
NOTE 1 This function is valid only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B. 2 The maximum value for network error counters is 65535. If an overflow occurs, no warning is issued and the error count returns to 0. Parameter
11533 Warning value for the number of fast Ethernet error detection occurrences
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Number of detection occurrences/minute [Valid data range] 0 to 128 Recommended setting = 0 Set a warning value for the number of Fast Ethernet error detection occurrences. When the number of 1- minute error detection occurrences becomes higher than or equal to the setting, the warning signal is output. If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 10 occurrences/minute basis.
NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. Fast Ethernet communication abnormality warning signal WETF<F0535.5>
[Classification] Output signal [Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs. [Function] If the total number of various errors detected by the communication hardware of the Fast Ethernet function is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11533 (standard setting 0, which means 10 retries per one minute), this signal is set to 1. Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.
- 177 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
A.TROUBLESHOOTING
A
A.1
TROUBLESHOOTING
CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB
This appendix describes troubleshooting related to Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server communication.
(1) Make sure that the STP cable between the hub and the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is connected. (2) Make sure that cables are properly wired. Though communication is carried out when the cable pair at the send and receive sides is not properly mounted, communications errors may occur more frequently. (3) Make sure that a hub for 100BASE-TX is used. A hub for 10BASE-T may be used to perform communication. In this case, however, the communication speed can decrease. (4) Make sure that the LIL LED on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is lit at all times. The LIL LED will not light if the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is not connected to the hub or if the hub is not ON. (5) Make sure that the LED (LINK indicator LED) on the connected hub is lit at all times. Some hubs do not have a LINK indicator LED. The LINK indicator LED will not light if the hub is not connected to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server or the CNC is not ON. (6) Make sure that a hub for full duplex communication only is not used. The Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server automatically detects the communication speed and communication mode (full duplex or half duplex) by using the auto negotiation function. In communication with a hub that does not have the auto negotiation function, the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server recognizes the communication speed correctly but regards the communication mode as half duplex communication. As a result, when an attempt is made to communicate with a hub for full duplex communication only that does not have the auto negotiation function, there is a discrepancy in communication mode, so correct communication cannot sometimes be performed. For details on how to connect, see Part V "CONNECTION."
A.2
CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK
General notes are provided below. For network installation, consult with specialized vendors or manufacturers. Run cables away from noise sources. The descriptions below are not applicable if the network is configured using only those hubs that have Ethernet boards connected. When the trunk is based on 10BASE-5 (1) Make sure that a transceiver is attached to the trunk correctly. If a transceiver is attached correctly, the resistance between the trunk shield and central conductor is about 25 (when a terminating resistor is attached). A special tool is required to attach a transceiver. (No special tool is required, depending on the manufacturer. For details, refer to the installation manual of each transceiver.) Do not attach a transceiver again to a point where a transceiver was once attached. (Otherwise, the cable can be damaged.) (2) Make sure that transceivers are attached at proper intervals. Transceivers must be attached at intervals of 2.5 m or more. It is recommended that transceivers be attached at intervals of an integral multiple of 2.5 m. Usually, marks indicating installation points are provided on the trunk cable.
- 181 -
A.TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
(3) Make sure that terminating resistors are attached. A terminating resistor must be attached to each end of the trunk cable. (Resistance: 50) (4) Make sure that the trunk cable is not longer than 500 m. (5) Make sure that the cable (transceiver cable) used for connection between a transceiver and the hub is not longer than a specified limit. Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50 m. However, the maximum allowable length of a cable with a smaller diameter may be shorter than 50 m. So, check the specifications of each cable. When the trunk is based on 10BASE-2 (1) Make sure that the length of each cable is 0.5 m or more. The minimum allowable distance between nodes (units) is 0.5 m. (2) Make sure that the trunk cable length (sum of the lengths of cables) is 185 m or less. (3) Make sure that terminating resistors are attached. A terminating resistor must be attached to each end of the trunk cable. (Resistance: 50)
A.3
CHECKING SETTINGS
The following describes how to check the minimum settings needed for communications.
NOTE For details on IP addresses, subnet mask and other set values, consult with the network administrator.
Checking settings on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server (1) Make sure that the MAC address of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is displayed. This address is appended to each board before shipment from the factory, and is automatically displayed in the Setting screen. This address need not be set by the user. (2) Make sure that the IP address is set. (3) Make sure that the subnet mask is set. (4) When a router is used, make sure that the router IP address is set. Checking settings on the personal computer (1) Make sure that the IP address is set. (2) Make sure that the subnet mask is set. (3) When a router is used, make sure that the router IP address is set. For details on how to set, see Part III "SETTING."
A.4
CHECKING COMMUNICATION
This section describes how to check the communication status between a CNC and the other communicating partner (host computer). If communication with the CNC sometimes fails or is not possible, first make sure that the communication path is normal by the following procedure. The "ping" command is used to check communication. In the following example, a host computer running the Windows NT4.0 is used. Checking the communication path Open the DOS window, and enter 'ping "IP address of CNC"'. If a response is returned from the CNC, the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is connected to the CNC. (1) When a response is returned (normal connection)
- 182 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
A.TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) When a response is not returned (abnormal connection)
When a response is not returned, probable causes are either the hardware connection or a software setting, or both. Check the hardware connections and software settings again. Checking IP addresses for duplication IP addresses can be checked for duplication by the procedure described below. (1) Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the CNC to isolate it from the network. (2) Execute a ping command on another personal computer as described in " Checking the communication path." Since the CNC is disconnected from the network, no response should be returned. If a response is returned, the IP address is in use on another unit. Therefore, the IP address cannot be used on the CNC from which the cable was disconnected.
CAUTION The purpose of this check is to check for a duplicate IP address. It does not assure that the IP address is left non-duplicated because a unit having the same IP address may be turned on after the check or the same address may be set later. When setting an IP addressing, ask the network manager about duplication.
Checking for influence of electrical noise The "ping" command "-t" option is used for checking for the influence of electrical noise. This option sends ping packets until "Ctrl+C" is pressed.
- 183 -
A.TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
1.
About the influence of electrical noise from peripheral machinery (devices) (1) Turn the CNC is mounted ON to enable communications. (2) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine with the servo/spindle amplifier OFF, and issue the "ping" command from the host computer. (3) Count the number of lost packets (packets for which a response was not returned). If a lost packet occurs in this state, the machine is probably being affected by electrical influence from peripheral machines. Countermeasure: Pin-point the source of the electrical noise, and check the wiring again to prevent the influence of electrical noise. About the influence of electrical noise from mounted machinery (1) Start up the machine in the same way as 1 above. (2) Cancel the emergency stop on the machine with the servo/spindle amplifier ON, and issue the "ping" command from the host computer. (3) Count the number of lost packets. If more lost packets than in 1 above are occurring, a probable cause is the influence of electrical noise on the machine itself. General probable causes are the state of the ground on the machine or on the communicating party. Countermeasure: Check the state of the ground on the machine or on the communicating party, and insulate the communications trunk with the machine.
2.
For the method of checking the operating status and communication status of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, see Part VI MAINTENANCE as well.
- 184 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP
This appendix describes the method of setting up an FTP server that operates on the host computer to function as a communication destination for the Data Server functions.
NOTE This appendix provides just setup examples. The actual setup may differ from these examples depending on the personal computer environment and other factors. When actually setting up an FTP server, make proper settings with referencing the personal computer manual and others. To use an FTP server in a factory network, consult with the network administrator of the factory.
B.1
1.
SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
Set the CD-ROM of Windows 2000 Professional.
Installing the Internet Information Service
- 185 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX

2. Click [Install Add-On Components].
B-64014EN/04
3.
Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button to display the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] dialog box. Next, check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server].
- 186 -
B-64014EN/04
4.
Click the [OK] button, then return to the previous screen. Next, click [Next]. The necessary files are installed. The installation is completed when the following screen appears:
Setting the Internet Information Service

1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel].
- 187 -

2. Double-click [Administrative Tools].
B-64014EN/04
3.
Double-click [Internet Service Manager] for activation.
- 188 -
B-64014EN/04
4.
Double-click the computer name. Next, select [Default FTP Site] and right-click to display the menu. Then, select Properties.
5.
Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet. Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP Site Directory]. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is accessible can be determined.
6.
Upon completion of setting, click the [Apply] button. In [Default FTP Site], the directory named "\Inetpub\ftproot", set in [Local Path] above (in the drive where Windows 2000 is installed), is assumed to be the home directory. So, directories under this directory can be accessed. So, with the default setting, NC programs need to be managed under this directory. The home directory can be changed by setting the new directory in the [Local Path] of [FTP Site Directory].
- 189 -

7.
B-64014EN/04
To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory, a virtual directory needs to be set. For details of a virtual directory, use the online help information of Windows 2000.
Login user setting

1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel].
2.
Double-click the icon [Users and Passwords].
- 190 -
B-64014EN/04
3.
Click the [Add] button, then enter necessary items such as a user name.
4.
Click the [Next] button, then enter a password for the specified user name. (Unless a password is set, access to the FTP server cannot be made correctly. So, be sure to enter a password.)
- 191 -

5.
B-64014EN/04
Click the [Next] button, then set an access right to be granted. The access right set here can affect the capability to read from and write to a file in FTP-based communication. Use care when setting an access right.
6.
Click the [Finish] button. The entered user name is registered, and the user can log in by using the user name and password.
Stopping password expiration for a login user

If the password expiration is not stopped, when the password expires, login is disabled, preventing FTP communication. Therefore, stop the password expiration as necessary. When a password has expired, it is necessary to set the password again. 1. Select [Start] [Settings] [Control Panel].
- 192 -
B-64014EN/04
2.
Double-click the icon [Users and Passwords].
3.
Click the [Advanced] tab.
- 193 -

4. Click the [Advanced] button.
B-64014EN/04
5.
Double-click [Users]. A list of registered users is displayed.
- 194 -
B-64014EN/04
6.
Double-click the user name for which you want to change the password setting. For example, double-click "dtsvr".
7.
Check [Password never expires] and then click the [OK] button. The password expiration is stopped.
- 195 -
B-64014EN/04
B.2
SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE Windows XP Home Edition does not have IIS (Internet Information Service). Installing the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.
2.
Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].
- 196 -
B-64014EN/04
3.
Double-click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
4.
Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button to display the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] dialog box. Next, check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service].
- 197 -

5. Click the [OK] button, then return to the previous screen. Next, click [Next].
B-64014EN/04
6.
The dialog box above is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.
7.
The installation is completed when the screen above is displayed.

- 198 -
B-64014EN/04
2.
Click [Performance and Maintenance].
3.
Click [Administrative Tools].
- 199 -

4. Double-click [Internet Information Services].
B-64014EN/04
5.
Double-click [FTP Site], right-click [Default FTP Site] to display a menu, then select Properties.
- 200 -
B-64014EN/04
6.
Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet. Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP Site Directory]. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is accessible can be determined.
7.
Then, click the [OK] button. In the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory \Inetput\ftproot (on the drive where Windows XP is installed) is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed. To use a directory other than the default directory as a home directory, modify the local path of [FTP Site Directory] mentioned in step 6 above. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 7 above, a virtual directory needs to be set. For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows XP.
8.
- 201 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX Login user setting

B-64014EN/04
2.
Double-click the icon of [User Accounts].
- 202 -
B-64014EN/04
3.
Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name.
4.
Click the [Next] button, then set an account type. The access right set here can affect the capability to read from and write to a file in FTP-based communication. Use care when setting an access right.
- 203 -

5. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.
B-64014EN/04
6.
For password setting, click the previously created account in [or pick an account to change]. (The FTP server cannot be accessed without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)
7.
Click [Create a password], then enter a password for the specified user name.
- 204 -
B-64014EN/04
8.
Click the [Create Password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.

If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP server at the time of expiring the password. If you are necessary, stop the password expiration. If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password. 1. Select [Start] [All Programs] [Accessories] [Command Prompt].
2.
Input net user login-user /expires:never.
3.
If the above message is displayed, the password expiration is stopped.
Confirming the Firewall function of Windows XP

Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows XP Professional, the Data Server cannot communicate with the FTP server. If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection Firewall function.
NOTE When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function, are enabled. Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network administrator, and take special care. In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as required.
- 205 -

B-64014EN/04
2.
Click the icon of [Network and Internet Connections].
3.
Click the icon [Network Connections].
- 206 -
B-64014EN/04
4.
Right-click the icon [Local Area Connection] to display the menu. Then, select Properties.
5.
Select the [Advanced] tab.
6.
If [Internet Connection Firewall] is not checked, the Internet Connection Firewall function does not work. Then, the following confirmations are not necessary.
- 207 -

7. If [Internet Connection Firewall] is checked, click the [Settings] button.
B-64014EN/04
8.
If the [FTP Server] check-box is not checked, the FTP server function does not work. Check the [FTP Server] check-box. When the [FTP Server] check-box is checked, the following window is displayed. Then, click the [OK] button.
- 208 -
B-64014EN/04
9.
Select the [ICMP] tab.
- 209 -
B-64014EN/04
10. If the [Allow incoming echo request] check-box is not checked, the Data Server function cannot find the FTP server at the start of communication. At the start of communication of Data Server, if the message [FTP] (IP-address) IS NOT AVAILABLE is displayed, check this check-box.
Confirming the firewall function when Windows XP (Service Pack 2) is used

When Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2) is used, a different firewall setting procedure is used. 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.
- 210 -
B-64014EN/04
2.
Double-click [Security Center] to start it.
3.
Click [Windows Firewall] displayed at the bottom.
- 211 -

4. Select the [Advanced] tab.
B-64014EN/04
5.
Click the [Settings] button of [ICMP].
- 212 -
B-64014EN/04
6. 7.
If [Allow incoming echo request] is not checked, check it, and click the [OK] button. This allows a response to be made to PING from other devices. Select the [Exceptions] tab.
8.
Click the [Add Port] button, and make settings as follows:
- 213 -

9. Click the [OK] button.
B-64014EN/04
- 214 -
B-64014EN/04
B.3
SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE Windows Vista Home Basic and Windows Vista Home Premium do not have IIS (Internet Information Service). Installing the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.
2.
Click [Programs].
- 215 -

3. Click [Turn Windows features on or off].
B-64014EN/04
4.
Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Management Console] and [FTP Server] in [FTP Publishing Service]. Next, click the [OK] button.
- 216 -
B-64014EN/04
5.
The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.
6.
The installation is completed when the dialog box above and [Windows Features] dialog box are finished.

- 217 -

2. Click [System and Maintenance].
B-64014EN/04
3.
- 218 -
B-64014EN/04
4.
Double-click [Services] to start it.
5.
Select [FTP Publishing Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.
- 219 -

6.
B-64014EN/04
Display the [General] property sheet. Change [Manual] to [Automatic] in [Startup type] and click the [Start] button in [Service status], then click the [OK] button. End [Services].
7.
Return to [Administrative Tools], then Double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] ([IIS6 Manager]) to start it.
- 220 -
B-64014EN/04
8.
Double-click [FTP Sites], right-click [Default FTP Site] to display a menu, then select Properties.
9.
Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet. Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP site directory]. In [Directory listing style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is accessible can be determined.
- 221 -
B-64014EN/04
10. Then, click the [OK] button. In the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory \inetpub\ftproot (on the drive where Windows Vista is installed) is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed. To use a directory other than the default directory as a home directory, modify the local path of [FTP site directory] mentioned in step 9 above. 11. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 10 above, a virtual directory needs to be set. For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows Vista.
Login User Setting

2.
Click [User Accounts].
- 222 -
B-64014EN/04
3.
Click [Add or remove user accounts].
4.
Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name and set an account type. The access right set here can affect the right to read from and write to a file in FTP-based communication. Use care when setting an access right.
- 223 -

5. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.
B-64014EN/04
6.
For password setting, click the previously created account. (The FTP server cannot be accessed without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)
- 224 -
B-64014EN/04
7.
8.
Click the [Create password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.

If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP server at the time of expiring the password. If you are necessary, stop the password expiration. If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password. 1. Select [Start] [All Programs] [Accessories] [Command Prompt], right-click it to display a menu, then select [Run as administrator].
- 225 -

2. Input net user login-user /expires:never.
B-64014EN/04
3.
If the above message is displayed, the password expiration is stopped.
Confirming the Firewall function of Windows Vista

Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows Vista, the Data Server may not communicate with the FTP server. If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection Firewall function.
- 226 -
B-64014EN/04
2.
Click [System and Maintenance].
3.
- 227 -

4. Double-click [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security] to start it.
B-64014EN/04
5.
Click [Inbound Rules], select [File and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4 - In)] from the list, right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.
- 228 -
B-64014EN/04
6.
Display the [General] property sheet. Check [Enabled] in [General], then click the [OK] button. End [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security].
7.
Return to [Control Panel], then click [Security].
- 229 -

8. Click [Windows Firewall].
B-64014EN/04
9.
Click [Change settings].
- 230 -
B-64014EN/04
10. Select the [Exceptions] tab. Check [FTP Server], then click the [OK] button.
- 231 -
B-64014EN/04
B.4
SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE The FTP Server features depend on the Edition of Windows 7. Windows 7 Professional, Enterprise, and Ultimate have the FTP Server features. The setting described above is just an example. Installing the Internet Information Service
1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.
2.
Click [Programs].
- 232 -
B-64014EN/04
3.
Click [Turn Windows features on or off].
4.
Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Service] in [FTP Server] and [IIS Management Console] in [Web Management Tools]. Next, click the [OK] button.
- 233 -

5. The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.
B-64014EN/04
6.
The installation is completed when the dialog box above and [Windows Features] dialog box are finished.

- 234 -
B-64014EN/04
2.
Click [System and Security].
3.
- 235 -

4. Double-click [Services] to start it.
B-64014EN/04
5.
Select [Microsoft FTP Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.
- 236 -
B-64014EN/04
6.
Display the [General] property sheet. Choose [Automatic] from [Startup type] drop-down list. Next, if [Service status] is not [Started], click the [Start] button to start FTP service, then click the [OK] button to end [Services].
- 237 -
B-64014EN/04
7.
Return to [Administrative Tools], then double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager] to start it.
- 238 -
B-64014EN/04
8.
Right-click Computer name(PC1 in the following figure) to display a left side menu, then select [Add FTP Site...].
9.
The [Site Information] dialog box below is displayed. Input any site name in [FTP site name:] and physical path of the home directory in [Physical path:]. The physical path is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed. Click [Next] button.
10. The [Binding and SSL setting] dialog box below is displayed. Input the IP address and port number (usually 21) in [IP Address] and [Port]. Check [Start FTP site automatically] and select [No SSL] in [SSL]. Click [Next] button.
- 239 -
B-64014EN/04
11. The [Authentication and Authorization Information] dialog box below is displayed. Check [Basic] in [Authentication], choose [All users] from [Allow access to:] drop-down list in [Authorization], and check [Read] and [Write] in [Permissions]. Click [Finish] button.
12. Expand tree in left pane and select FTP site name set in step 9. A feature menu of FTP site is displayed. Double-click [FTP Directory Browsing].
- 240 -
B-64014EN/04
13. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is recommended to select [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is accessible can be determined.
14. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 9 above, a virtual directory needs to be set. For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows 7.
- 241 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX Login User Setting

B-64014EN/04
2.
Click [Add or remove user accounts].
3.
Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name and set an account type. The access right can affect the right to read from and write to a file in FTP-based communication. Use care when setting an access right.
- 242 -
B-64014EN/04
4.
Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.
5.
For password setting, click the previously created account. (The FTP server cannot be accessed without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)
- 243 -
B-64014EN/04
6.
8.
Click the [Create password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.

If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP server at the time of expiring the password. If necessary, stop the password expiration. If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password. 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.
- 244 -
B-64014EN/04
2.
3.
- 245 -
B-64014EN/04
4.
Double-click [Computer Management] to start it.
5.
Expand [Local Users and Groups] in left pane, then click [Users]. A list of registered users is displayed. Double-click the user name for which you want to change the password setting.
- 246 -
B-64014EN/04
6.
Check [Password never expires] and then click [OK] button. The password expiration is stopped.
Confirming the Firewall function of Windows 7

Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows 7, the Data Server may not communicate with the FTP server. If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection Firewall function.
- 247 -
B-64014EN/04
2.
- 248 -
B-64014EN/04
3.
Click [Allow a program through Windows Firewall].
4.
Click [Change settings].
- 249 -

5. Check [FTP Server] and network location types. Network location types depend on the connecting network setting and configuration.
B-64014EN/04
6. 7.
Click [OK] button to close this window. Return to [System and Security], then click [Windows Firewall].
- 250 -
B-64014EN/04
8.
Click [Advanced settings].
9.
Click [Inbound Rules].
- 251 -
B-64014EN/04
10. Check if [FTP Server (FTP Traffic-In)], [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)], and [File and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4-In)] are enabled. If those rules are not enable, select them and click [Enable Rule] in right pane. There are same name rule in [Inbound Rules], but their targets are different network location. The choice of rule to change enabled depend on rules [Profile] and network location types.
- 252 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP
EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP
This appendix describes the method of setting up the DNS/DHCP server of Windows 2000 Server.
NOTE This appendix provides just examples of setup using Windows 2000 Server. To use the DNS/DHCP server in an actual factory network, consult with the network administrator of the factory and make settings according to the actual network environment. Example of setting a simple network
An example of setup in a network configuration that satisfies the following conditions is provided: 1. The DHCP server and DNS server are operated using the same personal computer. 2. The IP address of the DHCP server and DNS server is 192.168.0.254. 3. The DHCP server controls the IP address range 192.168.0.10 to 192.168.0.29. 4. The domain controlled by the DNS server is named "factory". 5. The same domain includes the DHCP server, DNS server, CNCs, and a PC for FOCAS1/Ethernet applications.
Windows 2000 Server

DNS server DHCP server 192.168.0.254 Domain : factory
...
CNC
Automatic setting
CNC
Automatic setting
PC
Automatic setting
Example of network configuration
NOTE The setting described above is just an example. For setup in an actual network configuration in the factory, consult with the network administrator of the factory.
- 253 -
C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
C.1
EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server
1. Activating the Microsoft administrative console (DHCP)

Click [Programs] [Administrative Tools] [DHCP].
2. Adding a scope
Click [Action] [New Scope] to start New Scope Wizard.
Click the [Next] button.
- 254 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
Enter "factory" as [Name], and enter "FACTORY" as [Description].
Click the [Next] button. Enter 192.168.0.10 as [Start IP address], enter 192.168.0.29 as [End IP address], enter 24 as [Length], and enter 255.255.255.0 as [Subnet mask].
Click the [Next] button without entering any data.
- 255 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
Keep "8" days unchanged as Period, then click the [Next] button.
Keep [Yes, I want to configure these options now] selected, and click the [Next] button.
Click the [Next] button without entering any data. Enter 192.168.0.254 as IP Address, then click [Add].
- 256 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
Click the [Next] button without entering any data.
Keep [Yes, I want to activate this scope now] selected, and click the [Next] button.
- 257 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
Click [Finish].
3. Adding a scope option

Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory], then click [Scope Options] [Action] [Configure Options].
From the available options, find and check [DNS Domain Name]. Then, enter "factory" as String value.
Click the [OK] button. The following setting is made:
- 258 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
4. Enabling Dynamic DNS

Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory] [Properties] [DNS].
Check [Always update DNC] and [Enable updates for DNS clients that do not support dynamic update].
Click the [OK] button. This completes DHCP server setting.
- 259 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
C.2
EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server
1. Activating the Microsoft administrative console (DNS)

Click [Programs] [Administrative Tools] [DNS].
2. DNS server configuration

Click [Action] [Configure the server] to start [Configure DNS Server Wizard].
- 260 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
Keep [This is the first DNS server on this network] selected, and click the [Next] button.
Keep [Yes, create a forward lookup zone], and click the [Next] button.
Keep [Standard primary] selected, and click the [Next] button. Enter "factory." as Name. (Do not fail to enter "." after "factory".)
- 261 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
Keep factory.dns unchanged, and click the [Next] button.
Keep [Yes, create a reverse lookup zone] selected, and click the [Next] button.
Keep [Standard primary] selected, and click the [Next] button. Enter 192.168.0 as Network ID.
- 262 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
Keep 0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.dns unchanged, and click the [Next] button.
Click the [Finish] button.
- 263 -
C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP 3. Enabling Dynamic DNS
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
Right-click [Forward Lookup Zones] [factory].
Click [Properties]. For [Allow dynamic updates?], select [Yes].
Click the [OK] button. This completes DNS server setting.
- 264 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
D
D.1
Login
1 2 3 4
FTP CLIENT OPERATION
This appendix describes the method of operating an FTP client that operates on the host computer to function as a communication destination for the Data Server functions.
OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND

Enter "ftp IP-address-of-NC or host-name" at the command prompt. Enter a user name. Enter a password. The message, "230 User logged in, proceed." indicates that the login process has been completed successfully.
GET (acquiring a file from the FTP server)

1 Enter "get hard-disk-file-name."
MGET (acquiring files from the FTP server)

1 Enter "mget hard-disk-file-name (including a wildcard character)."
- 265 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION PUT (sending a file to the FTP server)

1
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
Enter "put host-file-name hard-disk-file-name."
MPUT (sending files to the FTP server)

1 Enter "mput host-file-name (including a wildcard character)."
DIR (acquiring a list of files of the FTP server)

1 Enter dir.
DEL (deleting a file from the FTP server)

1 Enter "del hard-disk-file-name."
TYPE (confirming the transfer type of the FTP client)

1. 2. Enter type. Whether the ascii mode or binary mode is set can be determined.
- 266 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
ASCII, BIN (changing the transfer type of the FTP client)

1. Entering bin can change the mode to the binary mode.
2.
Entering ascii can change the mode to the ascii mode.
Logout
1 Enter bye.
D.2
D.2.1
OPERATION USING THE Explorer

Displaying the File List
Windows Explorer can display the file list in Data Server by adding the network shortcut that connects to Data Server with FTP connection. Display layout (such as Icon, List, or Detail etc.) of files in Data Server can be selected by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
Register Data Server as a Network Place (for Windows 2000 Professional)

1. Start an Explorer.
- 267 -

2.
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
Select [Map Network Drive] in the submemu of [Tools] on the menu bar.
3.
Click Create a shortcut to a Web folder or FTP site. to start Add Network Place Wizard.
4.
Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server, then click [Next]. The format is ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server].
- 268 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
5.
Input the name for Data Server, then click [Finish].
6.
The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer. The icon of Data Server is added in My Network Places. For the next time, the file list in Data Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.
- 269 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
Register Data Server as a Network Place (for Windows XP Professional)

2.
- 270 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
3.
Click Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server. to start Add Network Place Wizard. Next, click [Next].
4.
Select Choose another network location, then click [Next].
- 271 -

5.
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
6.
Input the name for Data Server, then click [Next].
- 272 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
7.
Click [Finish].
Check [Enable folder view for FTP sites] in Internet Options as follows. (This item is checked by default.)
- 273 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
NOTE If this item is not checked, the file list in Data Server is displayed as shown in the following figure, and the files cannot be transferred by operating drag and drop.
9.
The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer. The icon of Data Server is added in My Network Places. For the next time, the file list in Data Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.
- 274 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
Register Data Server as a Network Location (for Windows Vista Business or Windows 7 Professional)
2.
Display the menu of [Organize], then check [Menu Bar] in [Layout] to display the menu bar.
- 275 -

3.
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
4.
Click Connect to a Web site that you can use to store your documents and pictures. to start Add Network Location. Next, click [Next].
- 276 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
5.
Select Choose a custom network location, then click [Next].
6.
- 277 -

7.
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
Input the name for Data Server, then click [Next].
8.
Click [Finish].
- 278 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
9.
The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer. The icon of Data Server is added in Computer. For the next time, the file list in Data Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.
NOTE 1 If Work Offline is run in Internet Explorer, when the file list in Data Server attempt to be displayed by the Explorer, the error shown below occurs.
In this case, it is necessary to stop Work Offline in Internet Explorer. Remove check [Work Offline] in submenu of [File] on the menu bar in Internet Explorer.
2 Even if the file list in Data Server is changed by operating CNC, it is not automatically updated in the Explorer. If the FTP communication with Data Server is not performed for five minutes or more, Data Server disconnects the FTP connection. Execute [Refresh] in the Explorer to acquire the latest file list in Data Server.
- 279 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
D.2.2
File Operation and File Transfer
NOTE Files in Data Server cannot be copied or moved to another folder in Data Server by standard operation of Windows Explorer. MOVE FOLDER
A work folder in Data Server can be moved by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created in Data Server by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
NOTE 1 To create a new folder in Data Server by standard operation of Windows Explorer, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is required. 2 The name of the folder ("New Folder") made by standard operation of Windows Explorer contains characters that cannot be used in Data Server. Be sure to rename that folder by operation of the Explorer. If not renamed, that folder cannot be used in Data Server. As shown in the following figure, characters that cannot be used in Data Server are displayed as # in DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen.
3 The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1, "Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION." DELETE
A file or folder (multiple files or folders) in Data Server can be deleted by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
NOTE 1 The folder to be deleted need not be empty. When the folder is not empty, all files and sub-folders in the folder are deleted. 2 There is not limitation of number of files or folders that can be selected at a time. 3 The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1, "Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION." RENAME
A file or folder in Data Server can be renamed by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
NOTE The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1, "Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION."
- 280 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
DISPLAY FILE CONTENTS

Contents of a file in Data Server can be displayed by standard operation of Windows Explorer.
NOTE Contents of a file is displayed by Internet Explorer regardless of the relation by the extension. If a file is not downloaded to the personal computer side, the contents of the file cannot be edited. FILE TRANSFER
Start two Windows Explorers. One Explorer displays the file list in Data Server, and the other displays the file list in the personal computer. Some files can be transferred by operating drag and drop from one window to the other. The figure below shows the example that a file in the personal computer side is transferred to the Data Server side.
File list in PC side
Operates drag & drop
File list in Data Server side

Example of file transfer by using Windows Explorer
- 281 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/04
NOTE 1 If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item, ETHERNET LOG screen in Section 2.1, ETHERNET LOG in Part VI, MAINTENANCE. 2 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and protection status. 3 The attribute of files to be transferred by using Windows Explorer is fixed to binary. When NC programs are transferred as text files, fix the attribute to text by the setting of NC parameter No.929. For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING." 4 When a file is transferred to Data Server, if a file having the same name as a file to be transferred from the personal computer is already present on Data Server, by the setting of bit 2 of NC parameter No.906, you can select whether the existing file is overwritten or an error is caused. For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."
D.3
SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack 2) / Vista
When an attempt is made to start FTP communication for the first time in Windows XP (Service Pack 2) or Windows Vista, the security alert shown below may appear. If the alert appears, consult with the network administrator, and select "Unblock" as necessary.
Security Alert of Windows XP (Service Pack 2)
- 282 -
B-64014EN/04
APPENDIX
Security Alert of Windows Vista
CAUTIOJN Since selecting "Unblock" means change in settings related to network security, be sure to consult with the network administrator in advance. If "Unblock" is selected carelessly, network security can be compromised.
- 283 -
B-64014EN/04
INDEX
INDEX
<A>
ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B .................9 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION...........176 APPLICABLE MODELS ................................................3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP.........................55 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS .............................................................47 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS .............................................................51 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .......................................69 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server ..............................................255 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server ..............................................261 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP.................254 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION................................................................78
<B>
BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS..........................................................33
<C>
CABLE CONNECTION.......................................142,145 Cable Materials ............................................................145 CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................152 CHECKING COMMUNICATION..............................182 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB .....181 CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK....181 CHECKING SETTINGS .............................................182 Clamping and Shielding Cables ...................................148 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION..............................................................177 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION ...................................................172 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION.......171 Component Layout................................................157,160 CONNECTING TO Ethernet .......................................142 Connector Specification ...............................................147 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC .........65
<F>
File Names of CNC File Management ...........................14 File Operation and File Transfer ..................................281 File Transfer Operation ......................................... 106,113 FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS ...................................25 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis ..................................122 FTP CLIENT OPERATION ........................................266 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION .............................30 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS .......................................118 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE ................................173
<G>
GENERAL.......................................................................3 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............... s-1 Grounding the Network................................................150
<D>
DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT......................13 DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS .....................................13 DATA SERVER MODES..............................................15 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION....................24 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ........................................................................s-1 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE............................17 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN..............................................................95,124 Diagnosis status............................................................120 DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED Ethernet AND OPTIONAL BOARD ....7 Displaying and Operating the File List ..........100,110,126 Displaying the File List................................................268 DNC OPERATION......................................................116 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS..............................26
<H>
HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ....157 HARDWARE OPTIONS.................................................9
<I>
Installation ............................................................ 133,138 Installation on a stand-alone type unit .................. 134,139 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit............ 133,138 Installing a memory card....................................... 135,140
<L>
LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE......................144 LED Indications and Meanings............................. 158,161 LIST FILE FORMAT ....................................................22
<M>
M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL ......................115 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS ......27
<E>
ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES ........148 ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING ..........................................91 Error numbers and error messages ...............................121 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION .......169 Ethernet LOG...............................................................164 EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP........................185
<N>
NC PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................20 NC PROGRAM INPUT........................................ 116,129 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT.................................... 117,129 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server .........................................................................14
i-1
INDEX
<O>
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN.....................................................................96 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS .....95 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN...................................................................108 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN.....................................................................36 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN.....................................................................48 OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION..............................................................123 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN .........................................................125 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .....................................119 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SCREEN ............................................119 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN.............................60 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER .....................20 OPERATION USING THE Explorer...........................268 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND............266 ORGANIZATION ...........................................................3
B-64014EN/04
SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .............................................................60 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION................................................................70 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION................................................................70 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)................................................................185 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ...............233 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ...............216 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)................................................................196 Signal Timing Charts .....................................................67 Signals............................................................................65 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION......164 SOFTWARE OPTIONS ..................................................9 Specifications........................................................ 133,137 Starting Diagnosis ........................................................120
<T>
Text Files and Binary Files ............................................15 Total connection diagram...................................... 135,140 TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................181 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION..............145
<P>
PREFACE ........................................................................7 Preparations for File Operation ....................................114 Preparations for File Operation and Editing.................107
<U> <R>
RELATED MANUALS ...................................................4 RELATED NC PARAMETERS........ 9,43,50,55,64,84,89 REVISION RECORD ......................................................1 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS ...............144 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION ................28
<W>
When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function......................................................................57 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data Server ...........................................................56 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server ...........55 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated 68 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted67 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected 68 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method) ......................................................................82 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice method)...........................................................79 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method) ......................................................................81
<S>
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 SCREEN LAYOUT .......................................................12 SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack 2) / Vista ..........................................................283 Selecting an Inquiry Destination ..................................120 Selection of Mode ..........................................................73 SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE OPTIONS.............................................10 Separating Signal Lines................................................148 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ........................................137,160 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ..............................................133,157 SETTING .....................................................................133 Setting Method by CNC Screen .....................................74 Setting Method by Personal Computer...........................78 SETTING OF DHCP .....................................................53 SETTING OF DNS ........................................................52 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION ......33 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ...........36 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION.....................52 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS .........48 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ...86
i-2
B-64014EN/04
REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition 04 03 02 01 Date Nov., 2010 Aug., 2005 Sep., 2004 Sep., 2003 Contents Addition of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B Addition of unsolicited messaging function and ftp file transfer function Correction of errors Addition of such as NC program input/output on the Data Server functions Correction of errors Addition of the machine remote diagnosis function Addition of the Series 31i/310i-A, 32i/320i-A Correction of errors
r-1
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32iMODEL A FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35iMODEL B Modbus/TCP Server function

1. Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 30iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 31iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 32iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 35iMODEL B Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL B-64014EN/04
Name
Spec.No./Version
2. Summary of change
Group
Name / Outline
New, Add, Correct, Delete
Applicable Date
Basic Function Optional Function Unit Maintenance parts Notice Correction Another
This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B.
Modbus/TCP Server function is added into APPENDIX E.
Add
Immediately
Add
Immediately
Title
Draw No. 02 Edit 2011.06.13 Date Date

Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
Design 2010.12.13 Design
Description Y.Honda Apprv. N.Mutai
1/11
E
E.1
Modbus/TCP Server function

OVERVIEW
The Server function of Modbus/TCP functions is supported.
NOTE 1 In this function, the client function of Modbus/TCP functions is not supported. 2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use Modbus/TCP Server function (R968).
Modbus/TCP data model

The following four kinds of data formats are defined as Modbus/TCP data model.
Table name Discrete input Coils Input Registers Holding Registers Object type (Data type) Single bit Single bit 16-bit word 16-bit word Type of READ/WRITE READ only READ-WRITE READ only READ-WRITE
NOTE 1 In FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function, only Holding Registers can be used. Discrete input, Coils, and Input Registers cannot be used. 2 "READ" means the input of data from the client, and "WRITE" means the data of output from the client.
Modbus/TCP function code

In FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function, the following function codes are supported.
Function code name Read Holding Registers Write Multiple Registers Read/Write Multiple Registers Code 03h 10h 17h
Modbus area (Holding Registers)

In Modbus/TCP Server function, the Modbus area (Holding Registers) of 64K words (128K bytes) is prepared.
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
2/11
And the Modbus area can be allocated to the PMC area. As a result, the data accessed from the client device to the Modbus area can be notified to the PMC area, and the user application (Ladder program etc.) can be accessed to the Modbus area through the PMC area. This allocation can be set up to three areas. The minimum access unit of Modbus area is a word and the range of the address is 1- 65536.
Modbus/TCP Client
Modbus/TCP Server Modbus area

(Holding Registers) 15 00001 0 7
User Application PMC area

0
0 Write Registers
15
Area1
Area2
0 Read Registers
15
Area3
65536
Specification of Modbus/TCP Server function

The specification of FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function is shown in the following. 1 2 Automatic TCP connection management is implemented. This means that user application (such as Ladder program) does not need to take care of TCP connection. Non-priority connection pool is implemented. This means that the oldest connection is disconnected when the requests from the multiple clients are received and the connections are full, FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function can receive the requests from the maximum 10 clients at the same time. Priority connection pool is not implemented. 3 Access control service is not implemented. This means that all of device can be accessed without authorization (user name, or password).
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
3/11
E.2
SETTING THE Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION
This chapter describes the communication setting for the Modbus/TCP Server function.
Notes on using the Modbus/TCP Server function
NOTE 1 The client of Modbus/TCP functions is not supported. 2 The number of Modbus/TCP clients that can be connected with one CNC is maximum 10 at the same time. When more than ten connections are attempted, the oldest communication is disconnected. 3 Please confirm that there is no problem as the entire system when communicating with the device of the other companies.
E.2.1
SETTING THE Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION
This section describes the setting screen for operating the Modbus/TCP Server function.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 Press function key .
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft keys [COMMON] and [Modbus SET], and then enter the parameters.

Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
4/11
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet. (Example of specification format "192.168.0.100") SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format "255.255.255.0") ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format "192.168.0.253")
Display item
Item MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the Fast Ethernet Description
Modbus SERVER screens

Press soft key [Modbus SET] to display the Modbus SERVER screen.
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
5/11
Modbus/TCP Server screen 1 (BASIC)
Modbus/TCP Server screen 2 (AREA1-3)
Setting item
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) Description Specify the port number for using Modbus/TCP Server function. The input range is from 0 to 65535. Usually, set 502. When 0 is set, the Modbus/TCP Server function is not operated. OPTION1 Bit 0 : BCE Byte arrangement in the Modbus area is assumed to be 0 : a little endian 1 : a big endian Bit 1 7 : RSV Be sure to set 0. STATUS PMC ADDRESS The top address in the E/R area of PMC that stores status is set. The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. This status is occupied by one byte. Specify a space (blank) when not using this status. In this case, --- is displayed. DATA Modbus ADDRESS The top address in Modbus area (Holding registers) where I/O is exchanged for the Modbus/TCP client is set. The setting range is 1 65536. DATA PMC ADDRESS The top address in E/R/D area of PMC that exchanges I/O for the Modbus/TCP client is set. The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. Only the even-numbered address can be set. Specify a space (blank) when not exchanging I/O. In this case, --- is displayed.
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
6/11
Item DATA SIZE
Description The data size (unit: word size) that exchanges I/O for the Modbus/TCP client is set. The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. Set 0 when not exchanging I/O.
CAUTION The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, on Series 30i/31i/32i-A and Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B it can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time. NOTE 1 When setting the PMC area, note the following: For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows: <Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead. 2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between an area such as the input data area of the user program and a PMC area used for other purposes. 3 This parameter is backed up and stored with Fast Ethernet. When backing up or storing the parameter, please execute it by the common screen of Fast Ethernet. 4 The changed parameter is effective by turning the power off and on. 5 Please set not to overlap the Modbus area in area 1-3. When the overlapping setting is done, operation is different in READ/WRITE as follows. In case of READ, the data in area n (n is the biggest number) is read. In case of WRITE, the same data as all the overlapping areas is written.
Byte arrangement of Modbus area (Holding Registers)

The byte arrangement in Modbus area is normally a little endian.
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
7/11
On Ethernet line
0 +00 +01 15 15 +00 +01
Modbus area
(Holding Registers) 0
PMC area
7 +00 +01 +02 +03 0
12h 56h
34h 78h
34h 78h
12h 56h
34h 12h 78h 56h
When Bit0 of OPTION1 is "1", byte arrangement of data becomes a big endian.
On Ethernet line
0 +00 +01 15 0 +00 +01
Modbus area
(Holding Registers) 15
PMC area
7 +00 +01 +02 +03 0
12h 56h
34h 78h
12h 56h
34h 78h
12h 34h 56h 78h
Status
The status detected by Modbus/TCP Server function
STATUS STATUS PMC ADDRESS Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Modbus status Bit0 Bit1 - Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 : The serious error was detected. : Reserved. : The initialization was completed. : Under communicating with one Modbus/TCP client or more.
E.2.2
MAINTENANCE SCREENS OF Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION
The connection status of the client of Modbus/TCP can be confirmed on this screen.
Procedure
1 2 Press function key .
Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
8/11
3 4
Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [Modbus MAINTE], and then Modbus SERVER MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST) is displayed.
Modbus/TCP SERVER MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)
Display item
Item CLIENT Description IP address of the Modbus/TCP client communicating with this Modbus/TCP Server is displayed. (Example of display form "192.168.0.200") It is displayed in order of communicating with this Server. TIME The connecting time of the Modbus/TCP client communicating with this Server is displayed. The displayed time is updated automatically. The display form displays hour (hhh), minute (mm) and second (ss) in the form of "hhh:mm:ss". When the maximum value is exceeded by "999: 59:59", the maximum value is not updated from "999: 59:59".
E.2.3
LOG SCREEN OF Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION
The communication log related to Modbus/TCP Server function is displayed.
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
9/11
LOG screen for Modbus/TCP Server function
Procedure
1 2 3 Press function key .
Press soft key [BOARD LOG] ([ETHER LOG] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) to display the Ethernet log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [Modbus], and then the information related to the Modbus/TCP Server function is displayed.
Modbus/TCP LOG screen
The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format MMM.DD hh:mm:ss, where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss represents second. The top item in the example above indicates 22:32:47 on September 10. To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].
NOTE The Modbus/TCP Server log information is stored in volatile memory and it is lost when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
10/11
The following lists major log message:

Error Code E-0B47 Log message TCP port number of Modbus/TCP Server is wrong E-0B48 Status PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server is out of range E-0B49 Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server is wrong E-0B4A Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server is out of range E-0B4B Modbus area of Modbus/TCP Server is out of range E-1001 All Modbus communication paths are busy The communication destination (Modbus/TCP client) exceeded 10 nodes. For a new communication destination (Modbus/TCP client), the oldest connection is disconnected. E-1003 Version number of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct version number according to the protocol of Modbus/TCP. E-1004 Length of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct size according to the protocol of Modbus/TCP. E-100B Function code of Modbus packet is wrong The specified function code might not be supported. Please refer to 1. Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION about the supported function code. E-1015 E-1016 E-1017 E-1018 E-1019 E-XXXX (No message) Internal error Report the error number to FANUC. Data value of Modbus packet is wrong Data address of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct data address according to the protocol of Modbus/TCP. Please specify a correct data value according to the protocol of Modbus/TCP. A value outside the valid setting range might be set. A value outside the valid setting range might be set. The odd address might be set. A value outside the valid setting range might be set. Meaning and action to be taken A value outside the valid setting range might be set.
Title

B-64014EN/04-1
Sheet
11/11
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i MODEL B EtherNet/IP Adapter function
1. Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 30iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 31iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 32iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 35iMODEL B Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL B-64014EN/04
Name
Spec.No./Version
Group
Name / Outline
Applicable Date
EtherNet/IP Adapter function is added as Appendix F.
Add
Immediately
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
Description Design T.Hosaka Apprv. N.Mutai
1/45
F
F.1
F.1.1
EtherNet/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION

OVERVIEW
INTRODUCTION
EtherNet/IP is a industrial Ethernet network. The specification of EtherNet/IP is managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), and its globalization and standardization are promoted. Therefore, EtherNet/IP has been adopted by many vendors, and it is possible to connect to various kinds of industrial devices. Moreover, EtherNet/IP devices can be used together with a general-purpose Ethernet devices because a standard Ethernet technology is used.
NOTE 1 EtherNet/IP Adapter function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i B only. 2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use EtherNet/IP Adapter function (R967). NOTE This chapter targets the person who has basic knowledge about EtherNet/IP. Therefore, it doesn't explain a basic matter of EtherNet/IP. For details of EtherNet/IP, please refer to Web site (http://www.odva.org) of ODVA that manages the specification.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
2/45
F.1.2
TERMINOLOGY
Direction of DI and DO
In this chapter, the signal that CNC receives from Scanner is DI, and the signal that CNC send to Scanner is DO.
CNC (Adapter)
DI DO
Scanner
Connection
To exchange the DI/DO data with EtherNet/IP, first the communication path, called " connection", is established. When the connection is established successfully, the DI/DO data can be exchanged. CNC supports maximum 32 connections.
Adapter and Scanner

The scanner sends the adapter the connection request, and the adapter responds to the connection request. When the adapter returns the positive answer, the connection is established. The scanner sends the communication setting to the adapter by the connection request. CNC supports the adapter function.
EDS file
The adapter offers the communication setting by the text file called "EDS file". The scanner or scanner setting tool reads this EDS file to acquire the communication setting. By operating the CNC screen, EDS file can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory.
Implicit message and Explicit message

In EtherNet/IP, there are two types of communication, one is to transmit DI/DO data to the device regularly, and another is to send a request to the device and receive a response. The former is called "Implicit message" and the latter is called "Explicit message". In Implicit message, DI/DO data is transmitted regularly based on the communication setting notified when the connection is established. There are Class 0 and Class 1 by the difference of the communication procedure. CNC supports Class 1. It uses UDP of Ethernet technology. Both Point-To-Point (unicast) and multicast can be used.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
3/45
The communication type of Explicit message is server/client. The client transmits the request of reading or writing the data to the server. The server returns the value based on the request from the client, and updates own value by the received value. There are Class 2 to Class 6 by the difference of the communication procedure. CNC supports Class 3. It uses TCP of Ethernet technology. Point-To-Point (unicast) only can be used. This chapter explains Implicit message in section "F.1.4 ALLOCATION SETTING AND SETTING OF SCANNER" and "F.1.5 EDS FILE", and explains Explicit message in section "F.1.7 EXPLICIT MESSAGE".
Originator and Target

At Class 1 communication (Implicit message), first, the connection is established. The scanner sends the connection request, and the adapter responds to this request. Therefore, the scanner is called as a originator of connection, and the adapter is called as a target of connection. CNC supports Class 1 target.
Client and Server

At Class 3 communication (Explicit message), the client sends the request of reading/writing the data from/to the server, and the server returns the requested value and updates own value by received data. CNC supports Class 3 server.
RPI and API

In the communication of Class 1, the scanner specifies the interval of the DI/DO data transmission. The interval that the scanner requests is called RPI (Requested Packet Interval). On the other hand, the interval when the DI/DO data is sent and received by an actual communication is called API (Actual Packet Interval).
Exclusive Owner, Input Only and Listen Only

In Class1 communication, there are following three types of communication.
Type of communication Exclusive Owner Both DI signal from the scanner to the adapter and DO signal from the adapter to the scanner is transmitted. To prevent the double writing, it is not allowed to write the value to the same DI signal from multiple devices. Input Only Listen Only Only the DO signal from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged. Only the DO signal from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged. It is effective only if other Exclusive Owner or Input Only connection is established. Description
Exclusive Owner is used in one-by-one communication. When the adapter notifies DO signal to many scanner devices, Input Only is used. Listen Only is for the special purpose like the monitor and it is not used usually.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
4/45
Allocation setting
In CNC, the data area exchanged between the scanner is specified by the setting called "allocation setting". The PMC data area is used. Maximum four allocation settings can be specified.
Network composition of I/O transmission

Both the adapter and the scanner can have multiple settings. The data area of DI/DO and the transmission interval can be specified separately. It is possible to communicate with a different device at each setting. Moreover, one DO area of the adapter can be transmitted to multiple scanners. In this case, the multicast is used.
Multiple scanners are connected to one adapter

Scanner
Setting1
DO signal of the adapter is transmitted by multicast

Scanner
Setting1
Scanner
Setting1
Scanner
Setting1
DI
DO
DI
DO
DI
DI
DO DI
Setting1
DO DI
Setting2
DO
Setting1
Adapter
Adapter
F.1.3
SPECIFICATION OF CNC ADAPTER FUNCTION
Specification of CNC
Item Supported CNC type Supported hardware Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B Following hardware is supported. - Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -B (Connector name: CD38B) - Fast Ethernet Board Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R) Hardware that operates the EtherNet/IP Adapter function and the Ethernet function is specified by parameter No.970. Please refer to "F3. RELATING NC PARAMETER" for details. Software component The two following software options are necessary to use this function. - EtherNet/IP Adapter function (R967) Description
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
5/45
- Ethernet function (S707) The EtherNet/IP Adapter function operates with the same hardware as the Ethernet function. It cannot operate with another hardware. Data Server function (S737) is exclusion to the EtherNet/IP Adapter function. EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Data Server function cannot be specified at the same time. EtherNet/IP Adapter function and FL-net function (J692) cannot operated with the same hardware. If the same hardware is specified, EtherNet/IP Adapter function does not operate.
NOTE When EtherNet/IP Adapter function is used, up to 5 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be connected to one CNC.
Specification of EtherNet/IP Adapter

Item Communication type Data type of CNC Maximum number of allocation setting Maximum data size per allocation setting Maximum number of connection Range of RPI Bridge to DeviceNet 4 ms to 10,000 ms (Setting unit : 1ms) Not supported 32 256 byte Class 1 target, Class 3 server PMC data (R, E and D area) 4 Description
Specification of communication
Item IP address Description Specified by either of the following methods. - Enters a fixed value from the CNC screen. - Acquires from DHCP server. (It is also possible to use the same IP address after that when acquiring it from the DHCP server once.) Port number Class 1 : 2222 (Fixed)
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
6/45
Class 3 : 44818 (Fixed) Ethernet interface Following settings are supported. - 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX - Half duplex or Full duplex - Auto Negotiation or Fixed Please refer to "F3. RELATING NC PARAMETER" for details.
F.1.4
ALLOCATION SETTING AND SETTING OF SCANNER
The I/O area used to exchange data with the scanner is specified in the allocation setting. The address and the size of the PMC area are set. Maximum four settings are specified. The following is the example that two allocation settings are used.
Number of Allocation setting 1 DI DO 2 DI DO 3 DI DO 4 DI DO 1:R1000 1:R1008 1:R2000 1:R2016 Not used Not used Not used Not used 8 8 16 16 Not used Not used Not used Not used PMC address Size
The scanner uses the adapter internal data number to specify the data to exchange. It is the values such as 101, 151, 102 and 152 in the following figure. The number of this internal data is called the instance of the Assembly object. In CNC, the relation between the number of the allocation setting and the instance of the Assembly object is fixed, and the relation is written in the EDS file. The setting tool of the scanner reads the EDS file, and acquires the relation between the allocation setting and the instance of Assembly object. The operator specifies the number of allocation setting as the connection used by the communication. Therefore, when the scanner device is set by using EDS file, the data area of the CNC can be specified by the number of the allocation setting. The general procedure of the setting for EtherNet/IP is as follows. A. The value is set to the allocation setting in the CNC screen.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
7/45
B. EDS file is output by CNC. C. The setting tool of the scanner reads the EDS file. D. The operator selects the allocation setting of CNC by operating the setting tool of the scanner, and specifies the scanner setting if necessary. E. The setting of EtherNet/IP is transmitted from the setting tool to the scanner device. The instance of the Assembly object corresponding to the selected allocation setting of CNC is notified to the scanner device. F. The scanner device establishes the connection to CNC by using the instance of the Assembly object, and exchanges the DI/DO data.
Scanner device
CNC
EtherNet/IP Adapter function Internal data
(Assembly object)
PMC area
A. F.
Class 1 Communication 101 151 Allocation Setting 1
A. F.
Class 1 Communication 102 152 Allocation Setting 2
E. (The instance of the Assembly object is notified.) PC

Setting tool of Scanner
B.
D. C.
EDS file
Allocation Setting - Instance of Assembly object
Selection of the Allocation Setting ->Specifies Assembly object
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
8/45
NOTE 1 In this chapter, the procedures of A and B in the figure are explained. Please refer to the manual of the scanner device for the procedure from C to E. 2 If either of the following case is applied, it is necessary to specify the instance of the Assembly object corresponding to the allocation setting of CNC at the scanner or the setting tool of the scanner. - The scanner is set without using EDS file. - Class 3 communication is executed to CNC. 3 Please refer to "F.6.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE" for details of the instance of the Assembly object.
F.1.5
EDS FILE
The setting of the connection that is acceptable by the adapter is described in EDS file with text format. By operating the CNC screen, EDS file is output to the memory card or the USB memory.
Type
There are following two types in EDS file.
Type Standard EDS file How to create Output EDS file after all allocation settings are disabled. EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting Output EDS file after at least one allocation setting is enabled. Description EDS file that can be used for the general purpose The content of the allocation setting is not reflected. EDS file where the content of the allocation setting is reflected Items to set in the setting tool of the scanner are few and the setting is easy.
Contents of EDS file

The contents other than the setting of the connection are the same between the standard EDS file and the EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting. This section explains the setting of the connection.
Standard EDS file

The setting of the following connections is preserved regardless of the content of the allocation setting of CNC. [Four Allocation Settings : No.01 to No.04] * [Three types of communication : Exclusive Owner, Input Only and Listen Only] = Total 12 types The DI/DO data size is not preserved in EDS file.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
9/45
Please specify the size at the setting tool of the scanner according to the allocation setting of CNC.
EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting

The contents correspond to the allocation setting of CNC. Only the enabled allocation setting is preserved. Only the type of effective communication types are preserved based on the DI/DO size of the allocation setting of CNC.
DI/DO size Exclusive Owner in Allocation Setting DI size : 1 or more Enabled DO size : 1 or more DI size : 0 Disabled DO size : 1 or more DI size : 1 or more Enabled DO size : 0 Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Input Only Listen Only
DI/DO size specified by the allocation setting of CNC is preserved in EDS file. Therefore, the setting of the size by the setting tool of the scanner is unnecessary. Standard EDS file can be used by any CNC, and any setting is possible. However, it is necessary to specify the value corresponding to the allocation setting of CNC at the setting tool of the scanner. When EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting is used, the setting at the setting tool of the scanner is easy because the allocation setting of CNC is reflected. However, this EDS file can not be used with CNC of other setting. Please use it properly according to the usage.
NOTE The value of ProductCode, MajRev and MinRev are the same between Standard EDS file and EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting. The setting tool of the scanner may be not able to distinguish these files.
Selection of the connection in the setting tool of the scanner

The setting of the connection preserved in EDS file is listed in the item of "Connection I/O type" or "Connection Name" in the setting tool of the scanner.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
10/45
Example of the scanner setting tool
The meaning of the name of the connection displayed in the setting tool of the scanner is as follows.
No.01 Exclusive Owner Type of communication : Exclusive Owner, Input Only or Listen Only Number of the allocation setting : No.01 to No.04
Please select the allocation setting and the type of communication that is used by the communication with the adapter.
F.1.6
UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN
Unit of the data and concurrency

The unit of the I/O data exchanged with the scanner can be selected from byte (1 byte), word (2 byte), and long (4 byte). The unit of data, the restriction of the PMC address, and the restriction of the size are as follows.
Unit of data Byte (1 byte) Word (2 byte) N.A. Aligned with 2-byte boundaries (Even address only) Long (4 byte) Aligned with 4-byte boundaries (Value can be fourthly divided only) Restriction of PMC address N.A. Aligned with 2-byte boundaries (Even size only) Aligned with 4-byte boundaries (Value can be fourthly divided only) Restriction of size
The concurrency of the data is secured by the specified unit.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
11/45
Please refer to "OPTION" of "Allocation screen" in "F.2.3. EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN" for the setting method.
Conversion of endian
Whether the conversion of endian is executed or not can be specified. When the endian is not converted, the data is treated as a little endian. When endian is converted, the data is treated as a big endian. Please refer to "OPTION" of "Allocation screen" in "F.2.3. EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN" for the setting method. - Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is not converted. Ethernet line
0 +00 +01 15
PMC area
7 +00 +01 +02 +03 0
12h 56h
34h 78h
34h 12h 78h 56h
- Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is converted. Ethernet line
0 +00 +01 15
PMC area
7 +00 +01 +02 +03 0
12h 56h
34h 78h
12h 34h 56h 78h
- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is not converted. Ethernet line
0 +00 31 +00 +01 +02 +03
PMC area
7 0
12h
34h
56h
78h
78h 56h 34h 12h
- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is converted. Ethernet line
0 +00 31 +00 +01 +02 +03
PMC area
7 0
12h
34h
56h
78h
12h 34h 56h 78h

Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
12/45
F.1.7
Explicit message
In Explicit message, there are two types of communication, connection type and non-connection type. CNC supports both types. But this chapter explains only the Explicit message of non-connection type because it is used commonly. In Explicit message (Class 3), the PMC area can be read and written as well as Implicit message (Class 1). In CNC (Explicit message server), the PMC area read and written is specified by using the allocation setting. In Explicit message client, the area to read and write is specified by class and instance. It is necessary to specify the instance of the Assembly object to read and write the PMC area of CNC. Please refer to "F.6.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE" for the relation between the allocation setting and the instance of Assembly object. The procedure to read and write the PMC area by the Explicit message is as follows. 1. Specify the allocation setting of PMC area at the allocation screen of CNC. 2. Confirm the instance of Assembly object corresponding to the specified allocation setting. Example) DO (T->O) of allocation setting No.1 is 65h and DI (O->T) of allocation setting No.1 is 97h. 3. In the Explicit message client, execute the function, Get_Attribute_Sigle (reading) or Set_Attribute_Single (writing), with the argument of Assembly class (04h), instance corresponding to the allocation setting (65h and 97h, etc) .
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
13/45
F.2
SETTING AND MAINTENANCE
This section explains the setting and the maintenance of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function. To communicate with devices by EtherNet/IP, first set IP address, then specify the setting of EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
F.2.1
SETTING OF IP ADDRESS
There are two methods of setting IP address. 1. Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen. 2. Acquires a value from DHCP server Please select the setting method according to the operation of the network.
Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen.

Please input the value to IP address, subnet mask and router IP address referring to the section "COMMON screen (BASIC)" in "III. SETTING 3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN" of this manual. When the FOCAS2 function is not used, the input to the items PORT NUMBER (TCP), PORT NUMBER (UDP) and TIME INTERVAL are unnecessary.
Acquires a value from DHCP server

Please input the value to the necessary items referring to "III. SETTING 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" of this manual. When IP address is acquired from the DHCP server, there are two kinds of operation procedures. 1. Every time when the power supply is turned on, the setting is acquired from the DHCP server. 2. When the setting is acquired from the DHCP server, the setting is preserved in the nonvolatile memory. When the power supply is turned on next time and after that time, the preserved setting is used, and the setting is not acquired from the DHCP server any longer. Please refer to item OPTION 1 in Setting item of SETTING SCREEN for details. Basic screen in F.2.3 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
14/45
F.2.2
SCREEN LAYOUT
The kind of the hardware that is used by EtherNet/IP Adapter function is shown on the title bar of each screen.
Title [MULTI-FUNC ETHER] [BOARD(SLOT1)] [BOARD(SLOT2)] [BOARD(SLOT3)] [BOARD(SLOT4)]
Description Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i /35i -B Option board mounted in the optional slot 1 Option board mounted in the optional slot 2 Option board mounted in the optional slot 3 Option board mounted in the optional slot 4
F.2.3
EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN
EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen consists of the basic screen (page 1) and the allocation screens (page 2 to 5). A common setting to EtherNet/IP Adapter function is specified on the basic screen. A setting for each allocation setting is specified on allocation screens.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
15/45
NOTE 1 Before changing a parameter on the EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen, set the MDI mode or emergency stop state. 2 If the Change protection level of the Ethernet function is higher than the Operation level in 8-level data protection function, it is not possible to change the settings.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5 Press function key .
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press Page key to switch the page, and then enter the parameters.
Basic screen
1st page is basic screen. A common setting in the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is done.
EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen (Basic)
Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.
[DI DATA] :
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
16/45
Setting item
Item Description Specify the operation when the update of DI area stops. HOLD : DI area is held. (Nothing is done). DI DATA ON CLEAR : DI area is cleared to be zero. ABNORMAL Soft key is used to change the setting. Press Soft key [(OPRT)], [DI DATA], and then select [HOLD] or [CLEAR]. Specify the top address in the R/E/D area of PMC where the status of EtherNet/IP Adapter function is stored. STATUS When status is not used, set " " (blank). "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is displayed ADDRESS in STATUS SIZE. The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. It depends on the value of STATUS SIZE too. Specify the size of PMC area where status is stored. The content of status that is output to PMC area is limited according to this size. STATUS SIZE When status is not used, set "0". "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is displayed in STATUS SIZE. The setting range is either 0, 1 or 3. Bit 0-1 : These bits specify the operation when IP address, subnet mask, router IP address, DNS IP address 1 and 2 and domain are acquired from DHCP server by using DHCP client function (No.904#6). Bit 0 : Parameters acquired by DHCP client function are 0 : not saved in nonvolatile memory (SRAM). 1 : saved in nonvolatile memory . When succeeding in saving, Bit 1 is automatically set to 1. Bit 1 : DHCP client function is 0 : enabled. OPTION 1 1 : disabled. (It is not possible to set this bit manually.) Bit 2-4 : Reserved (Must be zero) Bit 7 : EtherNet/IP function is 0 : enabled. 1 : disabled. When disabled, the communication is not done. And in the maintenance screen, the indicators of MS and NS turn off, and the value zero is displayed in all items from VENDOR ID to SERIAL NO. Bit 0 : When the power supply is turned on next time, the setting of EtherNet/IP is OPTION 2 0 : not initialized. 1 : initialized. FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i MODEL B EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
17/45
Bit 1-7 : Reserved (Must be zero)
CAUTION 1 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time. 2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used for other purposes. NOTE 1 When a parameter is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back on again. 2 For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows: <Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
Display item
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) Description The standard port number for EtherNet/IP TCP (44818) is displayed. The standard port number for EtherNet/IP UDP (2222) is displayed.
Status
The status is a data detected by EtherNet/IP Adapter function. When STATUS SIZE is 1, only the first byte of status is output to PMC area, and when STATUS SIZE is 3, all information is output.
Status #7
Status address +0 +1 +2 OPE -
#6
-
#5
-
#4
-
#3
ENA4 IN4
#2
ENA3 IN3
#1
ENA2 IN2
#0
ERR ENA1 IN1
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
18/45
Offset
Bit #0
Name ERR
Description Error (MS : recoverable fault or unrecoverable fault) Reserved
+0
#1-6 #7 #0 #1 OPE ENA1 ENA2 ENA3 ENA4
Operating correctly (MS : device operational) State of allocation 01 is enabled. State of allocation 02 is enabled. State of allocation 03 is enabled. State of allocation 04 is enabled. Reserved
+1
#2 #3 #4-7 #0 #1
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 01. Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 02. Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 03. Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 04. Reserved
+2
#2 #3 #4-7
CAUTION Even if the value of IN1 to IN4 is one, it is not guaranteed that the value of DI signal is effective. Please confirm whether the communication is effective by the value of an actual signal.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
19/45
Allocation screen
Page 2 to 5 is allocation screen. Page 2 to 5 corresponds to allocation 01 to 04.
EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen (Allocation)
[STATE] :
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
20/45
Setting item
Item Description Specify whether the allocation is used or not. ENABLE : This allocation is used. DISABLE : This allocation is not used. If STATE is ENABLE, the setting can not be changed. When trying to change the setting, the message "Change ENABLE into DISABLE" is displayed. To change the setting, first set the item STATE to be "DISABLE". When the change is completed, STATE set the item STATE to be "ENABLE". When the item STATE is changed to "ENABLE", the conformance of the setting is confirmed. If there is a problem, the message is displayed and item STATE keeps "DISABLE". Moreover, when NC stands up, the conformance of the setting is confirmed. If there is a problem, item STATE is changed to "DISABLE" automatically. Soft key is used for setting. Press Soft key [(OPRT)], [STATE], and then select [ENABLE] or [DISABLE]. Specify the type of area where DI/DO data is stored. 0 : DI/DO data is not used. 1 : DI/DO data is allocated to PMC area. TYPE When the item TYPE is changed, ADDRESS is cleared to "---" and SIZE is cleared to zero. If " "(Space) is set to ADDRESS or "0" is set to SIZE, "0" is displayed in TYPE, "---" is displayed in ADDRESS and "0" is displayed to SIZE. The setting becomes unused. Specify the address of the area where DI/DO data is stored. When the item TYPE is "0", the value cannot be set. ADDRESS When the item TYPE is "1", the top address of PMC area is set. R, D or E area can be specified. The setting range depends on the actual range of R area, E area, and D area of PMC. It is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC area. Specify the size of area where DI/DO data is stored. When TYPE is 0, the value can not be set. SIZE When TYPE is "1", the size of PMC area is set. The range is 1 to 256 (byte). It is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC area. Bit 0 : Unit of data is Word (2 byte). 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled OPTION When enabled, both ADDREE and SIZE must be aligned with 2-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS / SIZE = R1000/2, R1002/4, E1004/6 Bit 1 : Unit of data is Long (4 byte). FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i MODEL B EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
21/45
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled When enabled, both ADDRESS and SIZE must be aligned with 4-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS / SIZE = R1000/4, R1004/8, E1008/12 When both Bit 0 and Bit 1 are 0, unit of data is byte (1 byte). When both Bit 0 and Bit 1 are 1, the setting is error. Bit 2 : Endian conversion is 0 : disabled 1 : enabled Bit 3-7 : Reserved (Must be zero)
CAUTION 1 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time. 2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used for other purposes. NOTE 1 When item STATE is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back on again. 2 For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows: <Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
Conformance of the allocation setting

When the item STATE is changed to "ENABLE", the conformance of the setting is confirmed. If either of the following conditions is filled, the item STATE cannot be changed to "ENABLE" because there is a problem. - For both DI and DO, the item TYPE is "0". - The item TYPE is set to "1", but the item ADDRESS is "---" or the item SIZE is 0.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
22/45
- The range of DI/DO area is out of PMC area. - OPTION Bit 0 and Bit 1 are both set to "1". - OPTION Bit 0 is set to "1", but the unit of the item ADDRESS or SIZE is not aligned with 2-byte boundaries. - OPTION Bit 0 is set to "1", but the unit of the item ADDRESS or SIZE is not aligned with 4-byte boundaries.
F.2.4
BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING
This section explains how to back up or restore the setting of EtherNet/IP Adapter function. The setting can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory. When backing up and restoring the setting of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the communication parameters of the Ethernet function is backed up and restored too.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press function key .
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], and [ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring settings appear. Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed. The character string EXECUTING blinks during execution.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
23/45
BACKUP
The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Fast Ethernet function are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name EIPADPT.MEM is used.
RESTORE
The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Fast Ethernet function are read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name EIPADPT.MEM is used.
ALL BACKUP
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP Adapter are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name NETWORK.MEM is used.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
24/45
ALL RESTORE
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device and EtherNet/IP adapter are read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC, that parameter is not saved to the SRAM. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name NETWORK.MEM is used.
CAUTION While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device. NOTE 1 A backup or restore operation for communication parameters can only be performed in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or emergency stop state. 2 When communication parameters are restored, an alarm condition occurs that requires power-off. 3 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether back up or restore of the communication parameter for Ethernet function and EtherNet/IP Adapter function is allowed or not depends on the setting of that function. Related NC parameter
0020 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input/output device
F.2.5
OUTPUT OF EDS FILE
This chapter explains the method of outputting the EDS file to the memory card or the USB memory.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
25/45
If the state of all allocation setting is disable, the standard EDS file is stored. If at least one of the allocation setting is enable, EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting is stored.
Procedure
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft key [EDS OUTPUT] appears. Press the soft key [EDS OUTPUT]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. Enter the file name of EDS file in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE] to output EDS file. If the file name is not specified, the file name F_CNC101.EDS is used. The character string EXECUTING blinks during execution.
CAUTION While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
26/45
NOTE 1 Output of EDS file can only be performed in the MDI mode or EDIT mode. 2 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether output of EDS file is allowed or not depends on the setting of that function. Related NC parameter
F.2.6
EtherNet/IP ADAPTER MAINTENANCE SCREEN
EtherNet/IP adapter maintenance screen consists of the adapter information screen (page 1), scanner list screens (page 2 to 5) and scanner detail screen. Adapter information screen shows the information about LED display of MS and NS, and information of the adapter such as Vendor ID, Device Type, and so on. Scanner list screen shows the list of connected scanners. Scanner detail screen shows the detailed information like RPI and API for the selected scanner.
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5 Press function key .
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP A MAINTE]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press Page key to switch the page.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
27/45
Adapter information screen

1st page is a adapter information screen. Information about the adapter is displayed.
EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (adapter information)
Display item
Item MS NS VENDOR ID DEVICE TYPE PRODUCT CODE REVISION SERIAL NO. Description LED display of Module Status and its meaning are displayed. LED display of Network Status and its meaning are displayed. Vendor ID of the adapter is displayed in hex. Device type of the adapter is displayed in hex. Product code of the adapter is displayed in hex. Revision of the adapter is displayed. The format is Major revision.Minor revision. Serial number of the adapter is displayed in hex.
The LED display of MS and its meaning are as follows.

LED display of MS Steady Off Flashing Green Steady Green Flashing Red Steady Red DISABLE FUNCTION STANDBY DEVICE OPERATIONAL RECOVERABLE FAULT UNRECOVERABLE FAULT Meaning
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
28/45
The LED display of NS and its meaning is as follows.

LED display of NS Steady Off (MS is steady off too) Steady Off Flashing Green Steady Green Flashing Red Steady Red --NO IP ADDRESS NO CONNECTIONS CONNECTED CONNECTION TIMEOUT DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS Meaning
Scanner list screen

Page 2 to 5 is a scanner list screen. Scanner currently connected is displayed.
EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (scanner list)
Display item
Item Description IP address of the scanner now connecting to the adapter is displayed in the list. The scanner displayed in the list can be filtered by the allocation setting. SCANNER LIST Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [FILTER]. If the soft key [FILTER] is pressed, the end of the title changes as follows. [ALL] -> [ALLOCATION01]->[ALLOCATION02]->[ALLOCATION03]->[ALLOCATION04]->[ALL]->
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
29/45
Only the scanner connected with the allocation setting of the title is displayed in the list. The connection type Explicit Message is displayed in [ALL]. IP ADDRESS TIME When connect time exceeds 999:59:59, the display is not updated as 999:59:59. IP address of the connected scanner is displayed. The time connected with the scanner is displayed in the form of HHH:MM:SS.
Scanner detail screen
Procedure
1 2 3 On a scanner list screen, move the cursor to select the scanner for detail display. Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [DETAIL]. The scanner detail screen is displayed. To return to the scanner list screen, press soft key [LIST].
EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (scanner detail)
Display item
Item IP address of the scanner is displayed. When the connection is lost while displaying this scanner detail screen, the message "Disconnected" IP ADDRESS is displayed beside the IP address. In this case, the value of each item is not updated. Please return to the list, and select the scanner again. TIME ALLOCATION RPI (ms) adapter. It is the same as the item TIME in the scanner list screen. The number of the allocation that is used in the connection of the scanner is displayed. It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that the scanner requested to EtherNet/IP Description
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
30/45
O=>T (Originator => Target) means DI data receive interval (scanner => adapter ). T=>O (Target => Originator) means DO data send interval (adapter => scanner). It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that the EtherNet/IP Adapter function actually API (ms) processed. O=>T means DI data receive interval, and T=>O means DO data send interval. It is a number of packets that the adapter function normally received. RECV The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535. It is a number of packets that were not able to receive by the adapter function. LOST The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535. It is a number of packets that the adapter function normally sent. SEND The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.
F.2.7
EtherNet/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION LOG SCREEN
The log screen shows the log data about EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
Procedure
Press soft key [ETHER LOG] to display the Ethernet log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [EIP ADAPT], and then the information related to the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is displayed.
EtherNet/IP Adapter function log screen FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i MODEL B EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
31/45
The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format MMM.DD hh:mm:ss, where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss represents second. To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].
NOTE The log information of EtherNet/IP Adapter function is stored in volatile memory and it is lost when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.
The following lists major log message:
Error Code E-1107 Log message EtherNet/IP function and FL-net function cannot be used at the same time Meaning and action to be taken It is specified that the EtherNet/IP function and the FL-net function are operated with the same hardware. Please confirm the value of parameter No.970, 971, and 972. E-1109 All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are busy Connections of the maximum number have already been made. The connection cannot be established exceeding the maximum number. E-110A Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is refused E-110B Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is refused (RPI Error) The unacceptable connection request was received from the scanner. The unacceptable connection request was received from the scanner. RPI specified from the scanner is beyond the limits of value (4-10,000ms) that can be accepted. E-110C Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is refused (DI/DO Size Error) The unacceptable connection request was received from the scanner. The size of DI or DO specified from the scanner is different from the size specified by the allocation setting..
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
32/45
Error Code E-110D
Log message Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is refused (Assembly Instance Error)
Meaning and action to be taken The unacceptable connection request was received from the scanner. The instance of the Assembly object specified from the scanner is not in the adapter function. The instance of the Assembly object is created if the allocation setting is enabled. Please confirm whether the allocation setting is enabled.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
33/45
F.3
RELATING NC PARAMETER
NC parameter related to EtherNet/IP Adapter function is as follows.

#7 907 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 100 #1 FUL #0 FIX
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 FIX : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the auto-negotiation of Ethernet communication is 0 : valid. (10Mbps/100Mbps and full duplex/half duplex is distinguished automatically.) 1 : invalid. (The setting is specified by the following parameters, #1 FUL and #2 100.) #1 FUL : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the communication of Ethernet is 0 : Half-duplex. 1 : Full-duplex This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1. #2 100 : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the transmission rate of Ethernet is 0 : 10Mbps 1 : 100Mbps This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.
0970 Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function
0971
Select hardware that operates first FL-net function
0972
Select hardware that operates second FL-net function
[Input type] Parameter input
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
34/45
[Data type] Byte [Valid data range] -1 to 6 Hardware that operates each function is selected.
Value -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Not used Unsetting
Hardware
Multi-function Ethernet (reserved) Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 1 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 2 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 4
NOTE 1. EtherNet/IP Adapter function operates with Ethernet function on the same hardware that is specified by parameter No.970. 2. EtherNet/IP Adapter function cannot be operated on the same hardware as the FL-net function. Therefore, parameter No.970 and No.971 or No.970 and No.972 cannot be set to the same value.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
35/45
F.4
F.4.1
COMMUNICATION CONDITION
RPI AND DATA SIZE
In EtherNet/IP, the cycle of the data transmission is specified by RPI of each connection. The data length per second is calculated by the RPI and data size of each connection. CNC supports maximum four allocation settings. The total of data length per second is obtained by totaling these values.
Total of data length per second (byte) = 1000 ( Size of Allocation setting No.1 (DI + DO)) (byte) * RPI of Allocation setting No.1 (ms) 1000 ( Size of Allocation setting No.2 (DI + DO)) (byte) * RPI of Allocation setting No.2 (ms) 1000 ( Size of Allocation setting No.3 (DI + DO)) (byte) * RPI of Allocation setting No.3 (ms) 1000 ( Size of Allocation setting No.4 (DI + DO)) (byte) * RPI of Allocation setting No.4 (ms) ) )+ )+ )+
NOTE Both DI size and DO size are added to the data length per second.
The maximum value of the total of data length per second that EtherNet/IP Adapter function of CNC can operate is about 128,000 bytes. Please adjust the setting of RPI and the data size within this range.
NOTE The above mentioned maximum value of the total of the data length per second is the value for the condition that other Ethernet function like FOCAS2/Ethernet function or CNC Screen Display Function than EtherNet/IP Adapter function is not used. There is a possibility of influencing to the performance when the FOCAS2/Ethernet function or CNC Screen Display Function is used together with the EtherNet/IP Adapter function. The actual load can be confirmed by the value of RPI and API displayed on the scanner detail screen. If the value of API is larger than RPI, the processing performance of CNC may be not enough. Please set the value of RPI and size so that the value of API is not regularly larger than RPI.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
36/45
Example 1) CNC communicates with a PLC by using Allocation setting No.1 with DI=200 bytes, DO=200 bytes, and RPI=4ms.
Adapter CNC Scanner DO=200 bytes, RPI=4ms Allocation setting No.1 DI=200bytes, RPI=4ms PLC
Total of data length per second = (200 + 200) * 1000 / 4 = 100,000 (bytes) Example 2) CNC communicates with three PLCs by using Allocation setting No.1 to 3. - PLC 1 : DI=64 bytes, DO=64 bytes, RPI=4ms - PLC 2 : DI = 128 bytes, DO = 128 bytes, RPI=20ms - PLC 3 : DI = 256 bytes, DO = 256 bytes, RPI = 20ms
Adapter CNC Scanner DO=64 bytes, RPI=4ms Allocation setting No.1 DI=64 bytes, RPI=4ms DO=128 bytes, RPI=20ms Allocation setting No.2 DI=128 bytes, RPI=20ms DO=256 bytes, RPI=20ms Allocation setting No.3 DI=256 bytes, RPI=20ms PLC 3 PLC 2 PLC 1
Total of data length per second = ((64 + 64) * 1000 / 4) + ((128+128)*1000/20) + ((256+256)*1000/20)) = 70,4000 (bytes)
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
37/45
F.4.2
INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME
This section explains the input/output response time seen from the scanner. It is assumed that input/output signal is processed by the ladder program in the scanner. In this case, input/output response time seen from the scanner is estimated by the following expression. Input/output response time seen from the scanner = Tin1 + Tin2 + Tin3 + Tin-out + Tout1 + Tout2 + Tout3
Scanner Ladder program
Tin1
Tout3
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Tout2
CNC Adapter PMC Data area
Tin2
Tout1
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Tin-out
Ladder Program
Tin3
Scanner output data reading time (Tin1)

It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal until EtherNet/IP scanner function receives the value of the signal in the scanner. Please refer to the manual of the scanner device for details.
Scanner ouput processing time (Tin2)

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP scanner function receives the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Adapter function receives the value from the network. The EtherNet/IP scanner function transmits the signal to the network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the scanner to the adapter, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
38/45
Adapter input data writing time (Tin3)

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function received the value of signal from the network until adapter function writes the value to PMC data area. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area immediately. Therefore, it can be estimated to be almost zero.
Adapter ladder program processing time (Tin-out)

The ladder program operates in a cycle that is a multiple of 4 ms or 8 ms depending on the size of the ladder program. The actual time can be measured with SCAN TIME on the PMC STAUS screen.
Adapter output data reading time (Tout1)

It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal to the PMC data area until EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads it in CNC. When RPI is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is fixed value of 32ms.
Adapter output processing time (Tout2)

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP scanner function receives it. The EtherNet/IP Adapter function transmits the signal to the network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the adapter to the scanner, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).
Scanner input data writing time (Tout3)

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP scanner function receives the data from the network until it sends the data to the ladder program. Please refer to the manual of the scanner device for details.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
39/45
NOTE 1 In CNC, the time from when the ladder program sets the value to the signal until the data is sent to the network is estimated in the expression, Tout1 + Tout2. The maximum value is as follows. - When RPI is smaller than 32 ms, RPI * 2 (ms) - When RPI is 32 ms or more, RPI + 32 (ms) 2 When the connection of the Class1 communication has not established it, the value of Tout1 is a fixed value of 32ms. Therefore, when the value is read by the Explicit message when Class1 is not communicated, the value is updated in each 32ms. When the value is written by the Explicit message, data is immediately reflected in the PMC data area.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
40/45
F.5
NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM
The following provides notes on creating a ladder program required to construct a safety system in a system that uses EtherNet/IP Adapter function.
CAUTION The time after the power is turned on until communication is actually started may vary depending on the connected device status and other factors. If it is necessary to strictly determine whether communication starts, use not the time or status, but actual communication data. Input and output signals
An output signal from the CNC is written by the ladder program into the PMC data area. The reading/writing process of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the signal and sent it to the Ethernet network. An input signal also flows a similar route in the opposite direction.
CNC
PMC Reading/writing Process Ladder program Process PMC data area EtherNet/IP Adapter DeviceNet function Scanner
Input signal Output signal
Ethernet
Ladder program process and reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP Adapter function

Processing by the ladder program and the reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function operate asynchronously with one another. Processing by the ladder program can operate independently of reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function, so the ladder program can be repeatedly executed at high-speed. The following figure shows a time chart of the internal operation of the CNC with signals output from the ladder program.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
41/45
mth
(m+1)th
(m+2)th
Ladder program process
Content of data area A: Content of data area B:
Reading/writing process of EtherNet/IP :

nth

(n+1)th

(n+2)th

(n+3)th
Transferred to scanner
The upper part of the figure indicates that processing by the ladder program is performed periodically and writing to data area A or data area B in the PMC is performed in the ladder program. The middle part indicates that how data area A and data area B are updated in this case. There are differences in the timing in which data is written to data area A or data area B even in the same execution cycle of the ladder program, so data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time. The lower part indicates that reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is cyclically made to read data in data area A and data area B. Since data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time, for example, in the case of (n+1)th refreshing, the data written by one execution of the ladder program cannot be read as one set. Conversely, when input signals from a scanner are processed in the ladder program, the data written by one execution of writing may not be read by one execution of the ladder program.
CAUTION Reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is made asynchronously with the execution of the ladder program. Therefore, keep the following in mind when creating a ladder program. 1. When a input signal from EtherNet/IP set in the specified PMC address is read from two points in the ladder program, even if the ladder program can be executed in one cycle, there is no guarantee that the same value can be read. 2. When the ladder program writes an output signal to EtherNet/IP in the specified PMC address, the signal may be transferred to a scanner device before the ladder program is completely executed.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
42/45
Concurrency of data
When DI data or DO data is handled with the ladder program, the concurrency of long data (4-byte data) and word data (2-byte data) is guaranteed (there is no data spikes) under the corresponding constraints.
CAUTION If the following constraints are not satisfied, the concurrency of long data or word data is not guaranteed.
Concurrency of long data (4-byte data)

To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions. 1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of four bytes. Commands: MOVD, MOVN, XMOVB, SETND, XCHGD, DSCHB, TBLRD, TBLWD, DSEQD, DSNED, DSGTD, DSLTD, DSGED, DSLED, DMAXD, DMIND, EQD, NED, GTD, LTD, GED, LED, RNGD, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORD, ANDD, ORD, NOTD, SHLD, SHRD, ROLD, RORD, BSETD, BRSTD, BTSTD, BPOSD, BCNTD, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDD, FBCDD, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSD, SUBSD, MULSD, DIVSD, MODSD, INCSD, DECSD, ABSSD, NEGSD 2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 4-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/4, 1:R0004/8, 1:R0008/12, 1:E0000/16 3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "1", and Bit 1 as "0" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the data unit of four bytes is specified.
Concurrency of word data (2-byte data)

To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions. 1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of two bytes. Commands: MOVW, MOVN, XMOVB, SETNW, XCHGW, DSCHB, TBLRW, TBLWW, DSEQW, DSNEW, DSGTW, DSLTW, DSGEW, DSLEW, DMAXW, DMINW, EQW, NEW, GTW, LTW, GEW, LEW, RNGW, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORW, ANDW, ORW, NOTW, SHLW, SHRW, ROLW, RORW, BSETW, BRSTW, BTSTW, BPOSW, BCNTW, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDW, FBCDW, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSW, SUBSW, MULSW, DIVSW, MODSW, INCSW, DECSW, ABSSW, NEGSW
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
43/45
2.
When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at Allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 2-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/2, 2:R0002/4, 3:R0004/6, 1:E0002/8
3.
By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "0", and Bit 1 as "1" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the data unit of two bytes is specified.
Concurrency of byte data (1-byte data)

There are no special constraints. The concurrency is always guaranteed in 1-byte data.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
44/45
F.6
F.6.1
ATTACHED MATERIAL
SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE
Supported class and instance are as follows.

Name Identity Message Router Assembly Connection Manager Port TCP/IP Ethernet Link Class code 01h 02h 04h 06h F4h F5h F6h 01h 01h 64h, 65h, 66h, 67h, 68h, 97h, 98h, 99h, 9Ah, FEh, FFh 01h 01h 01h 01h Instance number
The relation between the number of allocation setting and instance number of Assembly object is as follows.
Number of allocation setting 1 Output Assembly (T->O) Exclusive Owner, Exclusive Owner Input Only, Listen Only 65h (101) Size : 1 to 256 byte 2 66h (102) Size : 1 to 256 byte 3 67h (103) Size : 1 to 256 byte 4 68h (104) Size : 1 to 256 byte 97h (151) Size : 1 to 256 byte 98h (152) Size : 1 to 256 byte 99h (153) Size : 1 to 256 byte 9Ah (154) Size : 1 to 256 byte FEh (254) Size : 0 byte FFh (255) Size : 0 byte Input Only Listen Only Input Assembly (O->T)
Number of allocation setting 1 2 3 4 64h (100) Size : 0 byte Configuration Assembly
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-2
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.01.06
45/45
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
1. Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 30iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 31iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 32iMODEL A/B FANUC Series 35iMODEL B Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64014EN/04
Name
Spec.No./Version
Group
Name / Outline
Applicable Date
EtherNet/IP Scanner function is added as Appendix G.
Add
Immediately
Title
FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
Description Design S.Matsukura Apprv. N.Mutai
1/87
Index
EtherNet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION 3 G.1 OVERVIEW 3 G.1.1 G.1.2 G.1.3 G.1.4 G.1.5 G.1.6 G.2 INTRODUCTION 3 TERMINOLOGY 4 CNC OPTION AND EtherNet/IP FUNCTION 8 SPECIFICATION OF CNC SCANNER FUNCTION 8 SETTING PROCEDURE OF SCANNER 10 UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN 11
SETTING AND MAINTENANCE 13 G.2.1 G.2.2 G.2.3 G.2.4 G.2.5 G.2.6 G.2.7 G.2.8 SETTING OF IP ADDRESS13 SCREEN LAYOUT 14 EtherNet/IP SCANNER SETTING SCREEN 14 BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING 31 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE34 Initialize 36 EtherNet/IP SCANNER MAINTENANCE SCREEN 37 EtherNet/IP FUNCTIONS LOG SCREEN 43
G.3 G.4
RELATING NC PARAMETER 46 COMMUNICATION CONDITION 49 G.4.1 G.4.2 G.4.3 RPI AND API 49 RPI AND DATA SIZE51 INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME 54
G.5 G.6
NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM 57 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION 61 G.6.1 G.6.2 G.6.3 EXAMPLE (1)61 EXAMPLE (2)65 EXAMPLE (3)68
G.7
ATTACHED MATERIAL 74 G.7.1 G.7.2 G.7.3 G.7.4 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE 74 ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP 75 SCANNER SETUP BY EDS FILE 77 SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL 82
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
2/87
G
G.1
G.1.1
EtherNet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION

OVERVIEW
INTRODUCTION
EtherNet/IP is an industrial Ethernet network. The specification of EtherNet/IP is managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), and its globalization and standardization are promoted. Therefore, EtherNet/IP has been adopted by many vendors, and it is possible to connect to various kinds of industrial devices. Moreover, EtherNet/IP devices can be used together with general-purpose Ethernet devices because a standard Ethernet technology is used.
NOTE 1 EtherNet/IP Scanner function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power Motion i -A. 2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use EtherNet/IP Scanner function (R966). NOTE This chapter targets the person who has basic knowledge about EtherNet/IP. Therefore, it doesn't explain a basic matter of EtherNet/IP. For details of EtherNet/IP, please refer to Web site (http://www.odva.org) of ODVA that manages the specification.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
3/87
G.1.2
TERMINOLOGY
Direction of DI and DO
In this chapter, the signal that CNC (scanner) receives from adapter is DI, and the signal that CNC send to adapter is DO.
CNC (Scanner)
DI DO
Adapter
Connection
To exchange the DI/DO data with EtherNet/IP, first the communication path, called "connection", is established. When the connection is established successfully, the DI/DO data can be exchanged. Both EtherNet/IP Scanner function and EtherNet/IP Adapter function support maximum 32 connections.
Adapter and Scanner

The equipment that requests the connection to the adapter is the scanner. The equipment that responds to the connection request from the scanner is the adapter. When the adapter returns the positive answer, the connection is established. The scanner sends the communication setting to the adapter by the connection request. CNC supports the scanner function and the adapter function. This chapter explains about scanner function. In the following explanations, "EtherNet/IP functions" means both EtherNet/IP Adapter function and EtherNet/IP Scanner function.
EDS file
In EtherNet/IP, the equipment specification is provided by the text file called "EDS file". The information about the communication setting that the adapter can accept, or the communication control of the scanner. The scanner setting tool reads this EDS file to acquire the communication setting. EtherNet/IP functions allow preserving EDS file to the memory card or USB memory by operating the CNC screen.
Implicit message and Explicit message

In EtherNet/IP, there are two types of communication, one is to transmit DI/DO data to the device regularly, and another is to send a request to the device and receive a response. The former is called "Implicit message" and the latter is called "Explicit message".
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
4/87
In Implicit message, DI/DO data is transmitted regularly based on the communication setting notified when the connection is established. There are Class 0 and Class 1 by the difference of the communication procedure. CNC supports Class 1. It uses UDP of Ethernet technology. Both Point-To-Point (unicast) and multicast can be used. The communication type of Explicit message is server/client. The client transmits the request of reading or writing the data to the server. The server returns the value based on the request from the client, and updates own value by the received value. There are Class 2 to Class 6 by the difference of the communication procedure. CNC supports Class 3. It uses TCP of Ethernet technology. Point-To-Point (unicast) only can be used.
Originator and Target

At Class 1 communication (Implicit message), first, the connection is established. The scanner sends the connection request, and the adapter responds to this request. Therefore, the scanner is called as an originator of connection, and the adapter is called as a target of connection. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports Class 1 originator.
Fixed / Variable data size

In the communication of EtherNet/IP, fixed/variable data size is specified in the connection request. In case of a fixed size connection, always the specified size of data will be transferred. In case of a variable size connection, the amount of data on each transmission may be a variable size, up to the size specified in the connection. Normally, Implicit message uses fixed size transmission, and Explicit message uses variable size transmission.
Header format
In the class 1 communication, there are following four types of transmission data format; 32-bit header format, modeless format, heartbeat format, and zero length data format. EtherNet/IP Scanner function calls each type as Run/Idle, modeless, heartbeat, and zero length. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports Run/Idle, modeless and heartbeat format.
Type of header Run/Idle Description 2 byte sequence count and 4 byte header are added to the top of data. 4 byte header contains Run/Idle notification. Modeless 2 byte sequence count is added to the top of data. Run/Idle notification cannot be transferred. Heartbeat This type can be used when data size is zero. Only the 2 byte sequence count is transferred. Run/Idle notification cannot be transferred. Zero length This type can be used when data size is variable. The 2 byte sequence count is added to the top of data. Run/Idle notification is transferred by transmission data size. When data size is zero means Idle, and data size is one or more means Run.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
5/87
Client and Server

At Class 3 communication (Explicit message), the client sends the request of reading/writing the data from/to the server, and the server returns the requested value and updates own value by received data.
RPI and API

In the communication of Class 1, the scanner specifies the interval of the DI/DO data transmission. The interval that the scanner requests is called RPI (Requested Packet Interval). On the other hand, the interval when the DI/DO data is sent and received by an actual communication is called API (Actual Packet Interval).
Type of communication
In Class1 communication, there are following four types of communication. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports Exclusive Owner, Input Only, and Listen Only.
Type of Communication Exclusive Owner Both DO data from the scanner to the adapter and DI data from the adapter to the scanner is transmitted. To prevent the double writing, it is not allowed to write the value to the same area of adapter from multiple scanners. Input Only Listen Only Only the DI data from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged. Only the DI data from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged. It is effective only if other Exclusive Owner or Input Only connection is established. Redundant Owner Both DO data from the scanner to the adapter and DI signal from the adapter to the scanner are exchanged. It differs from Exclusive Owner, Redundant Owner is allowed to write the value to the same area of adapter from multiple scanners. Description
Exclusive Owner is used in one-by-one communication. When the adapter notifies DO signal to many scanner devices, Input Only is used. Listen Only is for the special purpose like the monitor and it is not used usually.
Production trigger
Production trigger specifies the data transmission timing of adapter. Usually, scanner uses a cyclic trigger, and also can use same trigger of adapter. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports all of production trigger type of adapter, but EtherNet/IP Scanner function only supports cyclic trigger of scanner.
Type of trigger Cyclic Change of state Description Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value. Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value. In addition, data is transmitted immediately when the state of the equipment changes.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
6/87
Application
Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value. In addition, it is also possible to transmit data according to the arbitrary timing.
Network composition of I/O transmission

Both the adapter and the scanner can have multiple settings. The data area of DI/DO and the transmission interval can be specified separately. It is possible to communicate with a different device at each setting.
Multiple adapters are connected to one scanner
Scanner
Setting1 Setting2
Multiple scanners are connected to one adapter

Scanner
Setting1
Scanner
Setting1
DO DI
DO DI
DI
DO
DI
DO
DI
DO
DI
DO
DO DI
Setting1
DO DI
Setting2
Setting1
Setting1
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Moreover, one DO area of the adapter can be transmitted to multiple scanners. In this case, the multicast is used. If multicasting of DO is performed by all equipments when equipments support both adapter function and scanner function, each equipment can read the signal of other equipments.
DO signal of the adapter is transmitted by multicast
Scanner
Setting1
DO Multicasting by all of equipments

No.1 Adapter DO Scanner 1 DI Scanner 2 DI No.2 Scanner 1 DI Adapter DO Scanner 2 DI No.3 Scanner 1 DI Scanner 2 DI Adapter DO
Scanner
Setting1
DI
DI
DO
Setting1
Adapter
ONLINE and OFFLINE

There are two states of ONLINE and OFFLINE in EtherNet/IP Scanner function of CNC. If a power supply is switched on, CNC start in the state of ONLINE. CNC communicates according to the preserved setting. Change the state from ONLINE to OFFLINE to change a setup. All executed communications are terminated when the state changes into OFFLINE. When a parameter is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm state. When the changing of setup is completed, turn the CNC power off and back on again. CNC becomes to ONLINE state and the changed setup becomes effective.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
7/87
G.1.3
CNC OPTION AND EtherNet/IP FUNCTION
In the option of CNC, EtherNet/IP Adapter function and EtherNet/IP Scanner function are provided. These functions are independent each other, and these can be operated as three types; only adapter function, only scanner function, and adapter + scanner function. When both the adapter function and the scanner function are specified, it operates with the same hardware. The adapter function and the scanner function cannot be operated with different hardware. The function of EtherNet/IP supported by each option is as follows.
CNC option EtherNet/IP Adapter function - Class 1 target - Class 3 server that reads and writes DI/DO signal EtherNet/IP Scanner function - Class 1 originator Supported EtherNet/IP function
The adapter function is required to communicate with scanner equipment such as PLC or etc. The adapter function is required to read or write DI/DO signal of CNC from the external machine by the explicit message of the class 3. The scanner function is required to connect the adapter equipment such as a remote I/O or an image sensor.
G.1.4
SPECIFICATION OF CNC SCANNER FUNCTION
Specification of CNC
Item Supported CNC type Supported hardware Description Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B, Power Motion i -MODEL A Following hardware is supported. - Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -B and Power Motion i -A (Connector name: CD38B) - Fast Ethernet Board Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R) Hardware that operates EtherNet/IP Scanner function and the Ethernet function is specified by parameter No.970. Please refer to "G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER" for details. Software component The two following software options are necessary to use this function. - EtherNet/IP Scanner function (R966) - Ethernet function (S707) The EtherNet/IP functions operate with the same hardware as the Ethernet function. It
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
8/87
cannot operate with another hardware. Data Server function (S737) is exclusion to EtherNet/IP functions. EtherNet/IP functions and Data Server function cannot be specified at the same time. EtherNet/IP functions and FL-net function (J692) cannot be operated with the same hardware. If the same hardware is specified, EtherNet/IP functions do not operate.
NOTE When EtherNet/IP functions are used, up to 5 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be connected to one CNC.
Specification of EtherNet/IP Scanner

Item Communication type Data type of CNC Maximum number of communication setting Maximum data size per allocation setting Maximum number of connection Range of RPI Bridge to DeviceNet Redundant Owner Fixed/Variable size Transport type 4 ms to 10,000 ms (Setting unit : 1ms) Not supported Not supported Fixed size is supported. Variable size is not supported. DI (T=>O) Multicast and unicast (Point-to-Point) are supported. NULL is not supported. DO (O=>T) Unicast (Point-to-Point) is supported. Multicast and NULL are not supported. Header format DI (T=>O) Run/Idle, modeless, and heartbeat are supported. Zero length is not supported. DO (O=>T) Run/Idle, modeless, and heartbeat are supported. Zero length is not supported. Priority DI (T=>O) Scheduled, low, high, and urgent are supported. DO (O=>T) 32 256 byte Class 1 originator PMC data (R, E and D area) 32 Description
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
9/87
Scheduled is supported. Low, high, and urgent are not supported. Production trigger DI (T=>O) Cyclic, change of state, and application are supported. DO (O=>T) Cyclic is supported. Change of state and application are not supported.
Specification of communication
Item IP address Description Specified by either of the following methods. - Enters a fixed value from the CNC screen. - Acquires from DHCP server. (It is also possible to use the same IP address after that when acquiring it from the DHCP server once.) Port number Class 1 : 2222 (Fixed) Class 3 : 44818 (Fixed) Ethernet interface Following settings are supported. - 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX - Half duplex or Full duplex - Auto Negotiation or Fixed Please refer to "G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER" for details.
G.1.5
SETTING PROCEDURE OF SCANNER
Maximum 32 communication settings can be specified in the scanner. One communication setting creates one connection. The scanner can be set by the following two methods. 1. Setup on the CNC screen. 2. Use other company's scanner setting tool such as "RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP" of Rockwell Automation, etc. See "G.7.4 SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL" about details of the method of setting the scanner by using RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP. The flow of the operation to setup on the screen of CNC is as follows.
Operation 1 If the state is ONLINE, change to OFFLINE. Description If the state is ONLINE, CNC is communicating by the preserved setting, and the setting cannot be changed. Change the state from ONLINE to OFFLINE to change a setting. All communications are terminated when the state changes into OFFLINE. FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
10/87
Select the communication setting
Select the communication setting for changing value from 32 communication settings. The setting which the communication state is "ENABLE" is effective to communicate, and the "DISABLE" setting is not effective to communicate. Change the communication state to "DISABLE" to change values. In the simple screen, set the item for which the setting is necessary.
If the communication state is "ENABLE", change to "DISABLE".
Change value by the simple screen.
Change value by the detail screen if necessary.
In the detail screen, more detailed setting can be done. In many cases, CNC can communicate equipments by only the simple screen setting.
Change the communication state to "ENABLE".
When the setup is completed, change the communication state to "ENABLE". CNC confirm settings when the communication state changes into "ENABLE".
Repeat from 2 to 7 operations if necessary.
To change plural settings, operate these repeatedly.
Turn the CNC power off and on.
CNC becomes to ONLINE state and CNC start to communicating with new settings.
G.1.6
UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN
Unit of the data and concurrency

The unit of the I/O data exchanged with the scanner can be selected from byte (1 byte), word (2 byte), and long (4 byte). The unit of data, the restriction of the PMC address, and the restriction of the size are as follows.
Unit of data Byte (1 byte) Word (2 byte) N.A. Aligned with 2-byte boundaries (Even address only) Long (4 byte) Aligned with 4-byte boundaries (Value can be fourthly divided only) Restriction of PMC address N.A. Aligned with 2-byte boundaries (Even size only) Aligned with 4-byte boundaries (Value can be fourthly divided only) Restriction of size
The concurrency of the data is secured by the specified unit. Please refer to "G.2.3.2 Simple screen" for the setting method.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
11/87
Conversion of endian
Whether the conversion of endian is executed or not can be specified. When the endian is not converted, the data is treated as a little endian. When endian is converted, the data is treated as a big endian. Please refer to "G.2.3.2 Simple screen" for the setting method. - Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is not converted. Ethernet line
0 +00 +01 15
PMC area
7 +00 +01 +02 +03 0
12h 56h
34h 78h
34h 12h 78h 56h
- Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is converted. Ethernet line
0 +00 +01 15
PMC area
7 +00 +01 +02 +03 0
12h 56h
34h 78h
12h 34h 56h 78h
- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is not converted. Ethernet line
0 +00 31 +00 +01 +02 +03
PMC area
7 0
12h
34h
56h
78h
78h 56h 34h 12h
- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is converted. Ethernet line
0 +00 31 +00 +01 +02 +03
PMC area
7 0
12h
34h
56h
78h
12h 34h 56h 78h
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
12/87
G.2
SETTING AND MAINTENANCE
This section explains the setting and the maintenance of EtherNet/IP Scanner function. To communicate with devices by EtherNet/IP, first set IP address, then specify the setting of EtherNet/IP Scanner function.
G.2.1
SETTING OF IP ADDRESS
There are two methods of setting IP address. 1. Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen. 2. Acquires a value from DHCP server Please select the setting method according to the operation of the network.
Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen.

Please input the value to IP address, subnet mask and router IP address referring to the section "COMMON screen (BASIC)" in "III. SETTING 3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN" of this manual. When the FOCAS2 function is not used, the input to the items PORT NUMBER (TCP), PORT NUMBER (UDP) and TIME INTERVAL are unnecessary.
Acquires a value from DHCP server

Please input the value to the necessary items referring to "III. SETTING 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" of this manual. When IP address is acquired from the DHCP server, there are two kinds of operation procedures. 1. Every time when the power supply is turned on, the setting is acquired from the DHCP server. 2. When the setting is acquired from the DHCP server, the setting is preserved in the nonvolatile memory. When the power supply is turned on next time and after that time, the preserved setting is used, and the setting is not acquired from the DHCP server any longer. Please refer to item "Basic screen" of "G.2.3.1 Basic screen, List screen" for details.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
13/87
G.2.2
SCREEN LAYOUT
The kind of the hardware that is used by EtherNet/IP Scanner function is shown on the title bar of each screen.
Title [MULTI-FUNC ETHER] [BOARD(SLOT1)] [BOARD(SLOT2)] [BOARD(SLOT3)] [BOARD(SLOT4)]
Description Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power Motion i -A Option board mounted in the optional slot 1 Option board mounted in the optional slot 2 Option board mounted in the optional slot 3 Option board mounted in the optional slot 4
G.2.3
EtherNet/IP SCANNER SETTING SCREEN
This section explains setting screens for the operation of EtherNet/IP Scanner function. Setting screens consists of the following screens.
Basic screen 1/2 List screen 2/2 Simple screen 1/2, 2/2 Detail screen 1/4 - 4/4
Consist of setting screens of EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
14/87
In the basic screen, basic settings of EtherNet/IP Scanner function can be set. The list screen shows communication setting list, and it is possible to move to the simple screen by selecting the communication setting to which the value should be changed. In the simple screen, settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set. In the detail screen, detail settings can be set, if necessary.
NOTE 1 Before changing a parameter on the EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen, set the MDI mode or emergency stop state. 2 If the Change protection level of the Ethernet function is higher than the Operation level in 8-level data protection function, it is not possible to change the settings.
G.2.3.1
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5
Basic screen, List screen
Press function key
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP S SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Basic screen on the 1st page is displayed. the parameters. Press Page key to switch the page, and then enter
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
15/87
Basic screen
1st page is basic screen. A common setting in EtherNet/IP Scanner function is done.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Basic)
Operation
Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys. [(OPRT)] :
[OFFLINE] :
[DI DATA] :
Setting item
Item Description There are two states of ONLINE and OFFLINE. ONLINE : CNC is communicating by the preserved setting, and settings cannot be changed. NETWORK OFFLINE : All communications of EtherNet/IP Scanner function are terminated. Initial value : ONLINE Settings can be changed. If a power supply is switched on, CNC will start with ONLINE. Change the NETWORK from ONLINE to OFFLINE by screen operation to change a setup. Turn the CNC power off and back on again to change the NETWORK from OFFLINE to ONLINE. FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
16/87
Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [OFFLINE], and then select [EXECUTE]. Specify the operation when the update of DI area stops. HOLD : DI area is held when DI area isn't updated by communication error of adapter. DI DATA ON ABNORMAL Initial value : HOLD (Nothing is done). CLEAR : DI area is cleared to be zero when DI area isn't updated by communication error of adapter. Soft key is used to change the setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [DI DATA], and then select [HOLD] or [CLEAR]. Specify the top address in the R/E/D area of PMC where the status of EtherNet/IP Scanner function is stored. Please refer to the "STATUS", described later, for details of status. STATUS ADDRESS Initial value : --When status is not used, set " " (blank). "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is displayed in STATUS SIZE. The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. It depends on the value of STATUS SIZE too. STATUS SIZE Initial value : 0 Range of value: 0,1,4,7,10,13 Specify the size of PMC area where status is stored. The content of status that is output to PMC area is limited according to this size. When status is not used, set "0". "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is displayed in STATUS SIZE. Bit 0-1 : These bits specify the operation when IP address, subnet mask, router IP address, DNS IP address 1 and 2 and domain are acquired from DHCP server by using DHCP client function (No.904#6). Bit 0 : Parameters acquired by DHCP client function are 0 : not saved in nonvolatile memory (SRAM). 1 : saved in nonvolatile memory. When succeeding in saving, Bit 1 is automatically set to 1. Bit 1 : DHCP client function is OPTION 1 Initial value : 00000000 0 : enabled. 1 : disabled. (It is not possible to set this bit manually.) Bit 2 : When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available, specify the contents of output to the EDS file. 0 : Output the EDS file for the scanner function when outputting it from the scanner function setting screen. Output the EDS file for the adapter function when outputting it from the adapter function setting screen. 1 : Output the EDS file which include the contents for both the adapter and the scanner function regardless of the output screen. FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
17/87
Bit 3-4 : Reserved (Must be zero) Bit 7 : EtherNet/IP functions are 0 : enabled. 1 : disabled. When disabled, the communication is not done. And in the scanner maintenance screen, the indicators of MS and NS turn off, and the value zero is displayed in all items from VENDOR ID to SERIAL NO. Bit 0 : When the power supply is turned on next time, initialization of the setting of EtherNet/IP scanner is OPTION 2 0 : not executed. Initial value : 00000000 1 : executed. Bit 1-7 : Reserved (Must be zero)
CAUTION 1 The D area in the PMC area is allocated to nonvolatile memory. In addition, the E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time. 2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used for other purposes.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
18/87
NOTE 1 When a parameter except the "NETWORK" is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back on again. 2 When the "NETWORK" is changed to OFFLINE, setting can be changed from other setting screens. 3 The following items are shared with EtherNet/IP adapter and scanner functions. When both the scanner function and adapter function are available, the changed content is reflected to the other. - DI DATA ON ABNORMAL - OPTION 1 4 The communication of the scanner function stops when "NETWORK" is changed to OFFLINE. When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available, The communication of the adapter function doesn't stop when "NETWORK" is changed to OFFLINE. 5 For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows: <Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
Display item
Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) PORT NUMBER (UDP) Description The standard port number for EtherNet/IP TCP (44818) is displayed. The standard port number for EtherNet/IP UDP (2222) is displayed.
Status
The status is a data detected by EtherNet/IP Scanner function. The 1st byte is status of the entire EtherNet/IP Scanner function. The 2nd byte or later are the status of each communication. It uses 3 bytes for every 8 communication settings. Output amounts of the communication settings to PMC area are specified by the status size.
Status size 0 1 4, 7, 10, 13 Status is not output. The status of entire EtherNet/IP Scanner function is outputted. The status of entire EtherNet/IP Scanner function and the status of 8, 16, 24, or 32 Description
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
19/87
communication settings are outputted.
Status
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 --+9 +10 +11 +12 OPE ENA08 CON08 IN08 ENA16 IN24 ENA32 CON32 IN32 ENA07 CON07 IN07 ENA15 IN23 ENA31 CON31 IN31 ENA06 CON06 IN06 ENA14 IN22 ENA30 CON30 IN30 ENA05 CON05 IN05 ENA13 --IN21 ENA29 CON29 IN29 IN20 ENA28 CON28 IN28 IN19 ENA27 CON27 IN27 IN18 ENA26 CON26 IN26 IN17 ENA25 CON25 IN25 ENA04 CON04 IN04 ENA12 ENA03 CON03 IN03 ENA11 ENA02 CON02 IN02 ENA10 ERR ENA01 CON01 IN01 ENA09
Status address
The figures of two digits of the end of signal name shows the number of the communication setting, and it is shown as xx in the following tables.
Signal Name ERR OPE ENAxx CONxx INxx data. Description Error (MS : recoverable fault or unrecoverable fault) Operating correctly (MS : device operational) The state specified by communication setting xx is "ENABLE". Connecting with equipment specified by communication setting xx. Connecting with equipment specified by communication setting xx, and DI area is updated by received
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
20/87
List screen
2nd page is list screen. When the cursor is moved and the communication setting is selected, the outline of the setting is displayed. The STATE can be changed to "ENABLE" or "DISABLE". And it is possible to move to a simple screen.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (List)
Operation
Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys. [(OPRT)] :
[STATE] : Select a setting and press soft key [(OPRT)], [SIMPLE SET], then it is possible to move to a simple screen.
Setting item
Item Description There are "ENABLE", "DISABLE", and "ERROR" state. ENABLE : This setting is enabled. CNC is communicating by the preserved setting. STATE Initial value : "DISABLE" This setting cannot be changed. DISABLE, ERROR : This setting is disabled and the communication is not executed. This setting can be changed. In this screen, STATE can be changed to "ENABLE" or "DISABLE". When the item STATE is changed to "ENABLE", the setting is confirmed. If there is not a problem, item STATE FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
21/87
keeps "ENABLE". If there is a problem, item STATE change to "ERROR". Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [STATE], and then select [ENABLE] or [DISABLE].
Display item
Item Description Displays the state of each communication setting. This value corresponds to the "STATE" in setting item. LIST O : Enable - : Disable E : Error SETTING NO. IP ADDRESS ADDRESS, SIZE, RPI Each of DI (T=>O) and DO (O=>T) value is displayed. Data length per second, which communicates with an adapter of the communication setting specified with the cursor. DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC Both DI and DO length are counted. Setting unit is [byte / second]. If STATE is not "ENABLE", this value is 0. DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC (TOTAL) Total values of "DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC" of all communication settings. Setting unit is [byte / second]. Number of the communication setting specified with the cursor. IP address of the communication setting specified with the cursor. Address, size, and RPI of the communication setting specified with the cursor.
G.2.3.2
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5 6
Simple screen
On the list screen, move the cursor to select the communication setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [SIMPLE]. The simple screen is displayed. Press Page key to switch the page.
Input values to all setting items. If necessary, move to detail screen to input values to detailed items. To return to the list screen, press soft key [LIST].
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
22/87
NOTE If the "NETWORK" is ONLINE or the "STATE" is ENABLE, settings can be displayed but setting cannot be changed. To change settings, change the "NETWORK" to OFFLINE and change the "STATE" to DISABLE. Simple screen
Settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set. 1st page is a setting for the target that is the communication destination, and 2nd page is a setting for CNC that is the originator.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Simple 1/2, 2/2)
Operation
In the 2nd page, press soft key [DATA UNIT] or [ENDIAN CHANGE] as needed, then press the following soft key. [DATA UNIT] :
[ENDIAN CHANGE] : To return to the list screen, press soft key [SET LIST]. To move to the detail screen, press soft key [DETAIL SET].
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
23/87
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS destination. Initial value : blank (SP) To use a hostname, the DNS client function (No.904#5) is required. ASSEMBLY INSTANCE Specify the input assembly number, output assembly number, and configuration Initial value : 0 assembly number of the adapter equipment assembly class. Range of value: When number is not used, set " " (blank). 0 to 65536 In "T=>O" or "O=>T", T means target (adapter) and O means originator (scanner) or blank (SP) SIZE Initial value : 0 Range of value: 0 to 256 Specify the interval of sending data (packet) in EtherNet/IP. RPI T=>O means sending interval of Target (adapter). Initial value : 32 O=>T means sending interval of Originator (scanner). Range of value: 4 to 10000 Setting unit is 1ms. Select the data unit from 1, 2, or 4 byte. DATA UNIT Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [DATA UNIT], and then select from Initial value : 1 byte [1-BYTE], [2-BYTE], or [4-BYTE]. Specify whether to convert endian. DISABLE : Endian is not converted. ENDIAN ENABLE : Endian is converted. Initial value : DISABLE Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [ENDIAN CHANGE], and then select from [ENABLE] or [DISABLE]. TYPE Initial value : 0 Range of value: 0 or 1 Specify the type of area where DI/DO data is stored. 00 : UNUSED 01 : PMC DI/DO data is not stored. If input/output data size is 0, set this value. DI/DO data is stored to PMC area. Specify the size (byte) of the area where input/output data is stored. Description Specify the IP address or the hostname of the adapter equipment of the communication
Specify the address of the area where DI/DO data is stored. When the item TYPE is "00:UNUSED ", the value cannot be set. ADDRESS Initial value : --When the item TYPE is "01:PMC ", the start address of PMC area, R/D/E, can be set. The setting range depends on the actual range of R area, E area, and D area of PMC. It is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC area.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
24/87
CAUTION 1 The D area in the PMC area is allocated to nonvolatile memory. In addition, the E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time. 2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used for other purposes. NOTE For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows: <Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.
G.2.3.3
Procedure
1 2 3 4
Detail screen
On the simple screen, press soft key [DETAIL]. The detail screen is displayed. Press Page key to switch the page.
Input values to setting items. To return to the list screen, press soft key [LIST].
NOTE If the "NETWORK" is ONLINE or the "STATE" is ENABLE, settings can be displayed but setting cannot be changed. To change settings, change the "NETWORK" to OFFLINE and change the "STATE" to DISABLE. Detail screen
Detail settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set. 1st page is a setting of data transfer for Target to Originator, and 2nd page is a setting of data transfer for Originator to Target.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
25/87
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Detail 1/4, 2/4)
Operation
Press soft key [TRANSPORT], [HEADER FORMAT], or [PRIORITY] as needed, then press the following soft key. [TRANSPORT] :
[HEADER FORMAT] :
[PRIORITY] :
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
26/87
3rd page is a setting of electronic key, and 4th page is a setting of whole communication.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Detail 3/4, 3/4)
Operation
Press soft key [COMPATIBILITY], [TIME OUT], or [PRODUCT TRIGER] as needed, then press the following soft key. [COMPATIBILITY] : [TIME OUT] :
[PRODUCT TRIGER] :
To return to the simple screen, press soft key [SIMPLE SET].
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
27/87
Setting item
Item Description Specify the data transport type between Target (adapter) and Originator (scanner), "1 to multiple" or "1 to 1". MULTICAST : 1 to multiple TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST Initial value : UNICAST Only the T=>O transport type can be specified. The O=>T transport type is fixed as "UNICAST". Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [TRANSPORT TYPE], and then select from [MULTICAST] or [UNICAST]. Specify the header format used by data transport. RUN/IDLE MODELESS HEARTBEAT : Use 32 bit Run/Idle flag : Don't use Run/Idle flag, and header size is more than 1. : Don't use Run/Idle flag, and header size is 0. : 1 to 1 ("Point-to-Point")
If header format for "O=>T" has not been changed from initial value, this is changed automatically by the SIZE value. It is changed to "RUN/IDLE" if SIZE value is 1 or more, and is changed to "HEARTBEAT" if SIZE value is 0. When the value is specified from the screen, the specified value is used after that. HEADER FORMAT Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [HEADER FORMAT], and then select from Initial value : [RUN/IDLE], [MODELESS], or [HEARTBEAT]. T => O : MODELESS O => T : HEARTBEAT This setting is specified according to the adapter equipment, and the following combinations are frequently used Exclusive Owner T => O: MODELESS O => T: RUN/IDLE Input Only or Listen Only T => O: MODELESS O => T: HEARTBEAT Specify the priority of the data transmission of EtherNet/IP. LOW: HIGH: PRIORITY Initial value: SCHEDULED Data is transmitted by low priority. Data is transmitted by high priority.
SCHEDULED: Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value. URGENT: Data is transmitted by urgent priority.
Only the T=>O priority of the data transmission can be specified. The O=>T priority is fixed as "SCHEDULED". Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [PRIORITY], and then select from [LOW], FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
28/87
[HIGH], [SCHEDULE], or [URGENT]. If it is necessary to specify the adapter equipment to avoid communicating with the adapter equipment not intended, input values to the following items from "VENDOR ID" to "COMPATIBILITY". ELECTRONIC KEY If it is not necessary to specify the adapter equipment, keep them to initialized value. The adapter equipment verifies the ELECTRONIC KEY that received from scanner equipment in the connection request and the own adapter information. If there is difference, the connection request is refused. VENDOR ID Initial value : 0000H Range of value: 0000H to FFFFH DEVICE TYPE Initial value : 0000H Range of value: 0000H to FFFFH PRODUCT CODE Initial value : 0000H Range of value: 0000H to FFFFH REVISION Initial value : 0.000 Range of value : 0.0 to 127.255 Specify the revision of adapter equipment. Format is the following. <Major number>.<Minor number> Specify "0.0" if verification is not necessary. Specify the presence of the compatibility of the specified Electronic key information verification. DISABLE (All of electronic key item has not been changed from initial value.): Electronic key information is not sent to the adapter equipment. Therefore, it is not verified. DISABLE (Some of electronic key item had been changed.): COMPATIBILITY Electronic key information is sent to the adapter equipment, and is verified Initial value : DISABLE without compatibility. It is possible to connect only when the value of all items agree with the adapter equipment. ENABLE: Electronic key information is sent to the adapter equipment, and is verified with compatibility. It is possible to connect if the adapter equipment judges it is compatible even if information of the electronic key is different. FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function Specify the product code of adapter equipment. Specify "0" if verification is not necessary. Specify the device type of adapter equipment. Specify "0" if verification is not necessary. Specify the vendor ID of adapter equipment. Specify "0" if verification is not necessary.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
29/87
It is necessary to set a correct value to "VENDOR ID", "PRODUCT CODE", and Major number of "REVISION". Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [COMPATIBILITY], and then select from [ENABLE] or [DISABLE]. Specify the multiplier used to calculate of the timeout value for the sending/receiving of TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER Initial value : x4 Range of value : x4 to x512 the DI/DO data. Timeout value = RPI value of DI (T=>O) * TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER When the timeout multiplier is [x4] and RPI is 10ms, if 40 ms pass from the last data reception and the following data is not received yet, it is judged to be a timeout. Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [TIMEOUT], and then select from [x4] to [x512]. Specify the time until reconnection is demanded when the connection is closed by some reasons. Setting unit is 1 second. RECONNECT Initial value : 0 Range of value : 0 to 60, blank It is reconnected after waiting the time specified again when failing in reconnection. ---: Reconnection is disabled. To specify this input " " (blank). 0 to 60: Demand reconnection when the specified time passes. Initial value 0 means 10 seconds. Specify the timing that the adapter equipment transmits data. CYCLIC: Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value. CHANGE STATE: Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value. In addition, adapter equipment transmits data when state of the equipment PRODUCTION TRIGGER Initial value: CYCLIC changes. APPLICATION: Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value. In addition, adapter equipment can transmit data according to the arbitrary timing. The timing that the scanner equipment transmits data is fixed as "CYCLIC". Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [PRODUCT TRIGGER], and then select from [CYCLIC], [CHANGE STATE], and [APPLICATION]. OPTION1 Initial value: 00000000 OPTION2 Initial value: 00000000 Bit 0-7: Reserved (Must be zero) Bit 0-7: Reserved (Must be zero)
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
30/87
G.2.4
BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING
This section explains how to back up or restore the setting of EtherNet/IP Scanner function. The setting can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory. When backing up and restoring the setting of EtherNet/IP Scanner function, the communication parameters of the Ethernet function is backed up and restored too.
Procedure
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP S SET] to display EtherNet/IP Scanner screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], and [ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring settings appear. Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed. The character string "EXECUTING" blinks during execution.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
31/87
BACKUP
The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Scanner function and Fast Ethernet function are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name "EIPSCANR.MEM" is used.
RESTORE
The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Scanner function and Fast Ethernet function are read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name "EIPSCANR.MEM" is used.
ALL BACKUP
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name "NETWORK.MEM" is used.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
32/87
ALL RESTORE
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device and EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter are read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC, that parameter is not saved to the SRAM. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name "NETWORK.MEM" is used.
CAUTION While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device. NOTE 1 A backup or restore operation for communication parameters can only be performed in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or emergency stop state. 2 When communication parameters are restored, an alarm condition occurs that requires power-off. 3 When the output level of 8-level data protection of Ethernet function is higher than that of the operation level, all backup/backup cannot be done, and warning message "PROTECTED" is displayed. (When other communication features exist, all backup is possible. ) 4 When the change level of 8-level data protection of Ethernet function is higher than the operation level, restore/all restore cannot be done, and warning message "PROTECTED" is displayed. (When other communication features exist, all restore is possible. ) Related NC parameter
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
33/87
G.2.5
OUTPUT OF EDS FILE
This chapter explains the method of outputting the EDS file to the memory card or the USB memory. When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available, the contents of output to the EDS file can be specified by the OPTION 1 Bit 2 in the basic screen.
OPTION 1 Bit 2 value The contents of output to the EDS file in the basic screen Output the EDS file for the scanner function when outputting it from the scanner function setting screen. Output the EDS file for the adapter function when outputting it from the 0 adapter function setting screen. Standard EDS file name for the scanner function is "FSCNC101.EDS", and standard file name for the adapter function is "F_CNC101.EDS". Output the EDS file which include the contents for both the adapter and the scanner 1 function regardless of the output screen. Standard EDS file name is "FWCNC101.EDS".
Procedure
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP S SET] to display EtherNet/IP Scanner screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft key [EDS OUTPUT] appears. Press the soft key [EDS OUTPUT]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. Enter the file name of EDS file in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE] to output EDS file. If the file name is not specified, the standard file name is used. The character string "EXECUTING" blinks during execution.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
34/87
CAUTION While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device. NOTE 1 Output of EDS file can only be performed in the MDI mode or EDIT mode. 2 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether output of EDS file is allowed or not depends on the setting of that function. Related NC parameter
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
35/87
G.2.6
Initialize
In the list screen, the communication setting specified with the cursor can be initialized
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Press function key .
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP S SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press page key to display 2nd page, list screen.
Press soft key [(OPRT)], press soft key [+] twice, then the soft key [INITIALIZE] for initialize appears. Move the cursor to select the communication setting to be initialized. Press soft key [INITIALIZE], soft key [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] are displayed. Press soft key [EXECUTE] then selected communication setting is initialized.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
36/87
G.2.7
EtherNet/IP SCANNER MAINTENANCE SCREEN
This section explains maintenance screens for EtherNet/IP Scanner function. Maintenance screens consist of the following screens.
Scanner information 1/3 Maintenance information list 2/3 Detail information
Adapter information acquisition 3/3
Consist of maintenance screens of EtherNet/IP Scanner function In the scanner information screen, the scanner information can be confirmed. The maintenance list screen shows information list of connected adapter, and it is possible to move to detail information screen from this screen. The adapter information acquisition screen can acquire the adapter information specified by IP address and can show them.
G.2.7.1
Procedure
1 2 3 4 5
Scanner information screen, Maintenance information list screen, Adapter information acquisition screen
Press function key
Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. Press soft key [EIP S MAINTE]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) The scanner information screen on the 1st page is displayed. Press Page key page. to switch the
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
37/87
Scanner information screen

1st page is the scanner information screen. The information about the scanner function of CNC such as MS or NS LED display, Vendor ID, Device Type, and so on can be confirmed in this screen.
EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Scanner information)
Display item
Item MS NS VENDOR ID DEVICE TYPE PRODUCT CODE REVISION SERIAL NO. Description LED display of Module Status and its meaning are displayed. LED display of Network Status and its meaning are displayed. Vendor ID of the scanner is displayed in hex. Device type of the scanner is displayed in hex. Product code of the scanner is displayed in hex. Revision of the scanner is displayed. The format is "Major revision.Minor revision". Serial number of the scanner is displayed in hex.
The LED display of MS and its meaning are as follows.

LED display of MS Steady Off Flashing Green Steady Green Flashing Red Steady Red DISABLE FUNCTION STANDBY DEVICE OPERATIONAL RECOVERABLE FAULT UNRECOVERABLE FAULT Meaning
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
38/87
The LED display of NS and its meaning is as follows.

LED display of NS Steady Off (MS is steady off too) Steady Off Flashing Green Steady Green Flashing Red Steady Red --NO IP ADDRESS NO CONNECTIONS CONNECTED CONNECTION TIMEOUT DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS Meaning
Maintenance information list screen

Page 2 is a maintenance information list screen. Each communication setting state is displayed.
EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Maintenance information list)
Operation
When the cursor is moved and the communication setting is selected, the outline of the setting is displayed. Press soft key [DETAIL], it is possible to move to the detail information screen about selected communication setting. Press soft key [GET INFO], it is possible to move to the adapter information acquisition screen and can acquire the adapter information.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
39/87
Display item
Item Description Each communication setting state is displayed. MAINTENANCE LIST O : I/O is communicating. E : Communication fault occurs, I/O is not communicating. - : Communication setting status is disabled. SETTING NO. IP ADDRESS the converted IP address will be displayed. The status of the communication setting. It corresponds to the symbol of the "LIST" shown by "( )". COM OK (O) : I/O is communicating STATUS COM ERROR (E) : Communication fault occurs, I/O is not communicating. DISABLE (-) : Communication setting status is disabled. ERR GEN Display error code that shows the cause when STATUS is a "COM ERROR". "ERR GEN" means the general error code and "ERR EXT" means the extended error code. ERR EXT Error code value is determined by the EtherNet/IP specification. Refer to the "G.7.2 ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP" about these error codes and meaning. The time connected with equipment is displayed in the form of HHH:MM:SS. The maximum value is TIME 999:59:59. Communication setting number. IP address of the communication setting. If the hostname is specified in the simple setting screen,
Adapter information acquisition screen

Page 3 is the adapter information acquisition screen. Communicate with the adapter equipment of specified IP address, and display acquired information.
EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Adapter information acquisition) FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
40/87
Operation
1 2 Specify a value to "IP ADDRESS" and press [GET INFO]. This screen communicates with the adapter equipment of specified IP address, and display acquired information.
NOTE Depending on circumstances of some adapter equipment, the transmission of the I/O data might stop when information acquisition is executed from this screen while transmitting the I/O data. Use information acquisition of this screen only for confirming communication target in case of network setting. Do not use information acquisition of this screen when system operation is actually begun, and when the I/O data is transmitted.
Setting item
Item IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address or host name of the adapter equipment to acquire information.
Display item
Item PRODUCT NAME VENDOR ID DEVICE TYPE PRODUCT CODE REVISION SERIAL NO. Description Acquired product name is displayed. "GET INFO ERROR" is displayed when acquisition fails. Acquired vendor ID is displayed. Acquired device type is displayed. Acquired product code is displayed. Acquired revision is displayed. Acquired serial number is displayed.
G.2.7.2
Procedure
1 2
Detail information screen
On the maintenance list screen, move the cursor to select the communication setting. Press soft key [DETAIL], detail information screen is displayed.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
41/87
EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Detail information)
Operation
Press soft key [LIST] to return to the maintenance list screen. Press soft key [GET INFO], it is possible to move to the adapter information acquisition screen and can acquire the adapter information.
Display item
Item IP ADDRESS STATUS ERR GEN These are same as items in the maintenance information list screen. ERR EXT TIME RPI (ms) The value of RPI set in the simple screen is displayed. Setting unit is 1ms. It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that EtherNet/IP Scanner function actually API (ms) processed. O=>T means DO data receive interval, and T=>O means DI data send interval. Setting unit is 1ms. It is a number of packets that the Scanner function normally received. RECV The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535. It is a number of packets that were not able to receive by the Scanner function. LOST The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535. SEND It is a number of packets that the Scanner function normally sent. FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function Description IP address of the selected communication setting is displayed.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
42/87
The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.
G.2.8
EtherNet/IP FUNCTIONS LOG SCREEN
The log screen shows the log data about EtherNet/IP Adapter and Scanner function.
Procedure
Press soft key [ETHER LOG] to display the Ethernet log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) Press soft key [ETHERNET/IP], and then the information related to EtherNet/IP functions is displayed.
EtherNet/IP functions log screen
The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format "MMM.DD hh:mm:ss", where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss represents second. To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
43/87
NOTE The log information of EtherNet/IP functions is stored in volatile memory and it is lost when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.
The following lists major log message: In the "A/S", "A" means log of the Adapter function, and "S" means log of the Scanner function. XX means a general error code, and YY means an extended error code. Refer to the "G.7.2 ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP" for the detail of these error codes.
Error Code E-1107
Log message EtherNet/IP function and FL-net function cannot be used at the same time
A/S A S
Meaning and action to be taken It is specified that the EtherNet/IP function and the FL-net function are operated with the same hardware. Please confirm the value of parameter No.970, 971, and 972.
E-1109
All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are busy [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
The connection request sent from the scanner was refused because the connection number exceed maximum number(32).
All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are busy [General=XXH:Extended=YYH:Scanner] E-110A Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is refused E-110B Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is refused (RPI Error)
The scanner sent connection request to the adapter, but it was refused because all connection of the adapter had already been used.
The unacceptable connection request was received from the scanner.
The unacceptable connection request was received from the scanner. RPI specified from the scanner is beyond the limits of value (4-10,000ms) that can be accepted.
E-110C
Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is refused (DI/DO Size Error)
The unacceptable connection request was received from the scanner. The size of DI or DO specified from the scanner is different from the size specified by the allocation setting.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
44/87
Error Code E-110D
Log message Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is refused (Assembly Instance Error)
A/S A
Meaning and action to be taken The unacceptable connection request was received from the scanner. The instance of the Assembly object specified from the scanner is not in the adapter function. The instance of the Assembly object is created if the allocation setting is enabled. Please confirm whether the allocation setting is enabled.
E-110E
[Connection has timed out. (Adapter:UU)] [Connection has timed out. (Scanner:VV)]
A S
The allocation setting number UU has timed out. The communication setting number VV has timed out.
E-110F
[Connection has closed. (Adapter:UU)] [Connection has closed. (Scanner:VV)]
A S S
The allocation setting number UU has closed. The communication setting number VV has closed. The connection request was sent to the adapter, but the response from the adapter was not received. Confirm whether the adapter power supply is on, or whether the adapter is correctly connected to the network.
E-1151
Response from EtherNet/IP Adapter was not received [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
E-1152
Error Response from EtherNet/IP Adapter was received [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
The error response was received from the adapter.
E-1153
Connect Request is refused [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
The connection request from the scanner was refused by the adapter.
E-1154
Connect Request is refused (DI/DO Size Error) [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
The connection request from the scanner was refused by the adapter. The size of DI/DO specified by the scanner is different from the adapter.
E-1155
Connect Request is refused (RPI Error) [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
The connection request from the scanner was refused by the adapter. RPI specified by the scanner cannot be accepted with the adapter.
E-1156
Connect Request is refused (ElectronicKey Mismatch) [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
The connection request from the scanner was refused by the adapter. The electronic key specified by the scanner is different from the adapter.
E-1157
Connect Request is refused (Assembly Instance Error) [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]
The connection request from the scanner was refused by the adapter. The assembly instance specified by the scanner cannot be used in the adapter.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
45/87
G.3
RELATING NC PARAMETER
NC parameter related to EtherNet/IP functions is as follows.

#7 904 #6 DHC #5 DNS #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 DNS : The DNS client function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. #6 DHC : The DHCP client function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.
#7 907 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 100 #1 FUL #0 FIX
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 FIX : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function is running, the auto-negotiation of Ethernet communication is 0 : valid. (10Mbps/100Mbps and full duplex/half duplex is distinguished automatically.) 1 : invalid. (The setting is specified by the following parameters, #1 FUL and #2 100.) #1 FUL : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function is running, the communication of Ethernet is
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
46/87
0 : Half-duplex. 1 : Full-duplex This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1. #2 100 : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function is running, the transmission rate of Ethernet is 0 : 10Mbps 1 : 100Mbps This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.
0970 Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function
0971
Select hardware that operates first FL-net function
0972
Select hardware that operates second FL-net function
[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] -1 to 6 Hardware that operates each function is selected.
Value -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Not used Unsetting
Hardware
Multi-function Ethernet (reserved) Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 1 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 2 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 4
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
47/87
NOTE 1. When EtherNet/IP functions are available, these functions operate together with Ethernet function on the same hardware that is specified by parameter No.970. 2. EtherNet/IP functions cannot be used with Data server function. Only Data server function can be used when both EtherNet/IP functions and Data server function option are specified. 3. EtherNet/IP functions cannot be used on the same hardware as the FL-net function. Therefore, if FL-net function is used with EtherNet/IP functions, parameter No.970 and No.971, or No.970 and No.972 cannot be set to the same value.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
48/87
G.4
COMMUNICATION CONDITION
It should be set that the load of the communication becomes within the range of the ability of equipment for stable EtherNet/IP communication. This chapter explains guidance for using EtherNet/IP functions under suitable load.
G.4.1
RPI AND API
RPI (Requested Packet Interval) is the interval of sending data in EtherNet/IP functions, and API (Actual Packet Interval) is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that EtherNet/IP functions actually processed. These values are confirmed in the detail screen of the scanner maintenance screen or in the scanner detail screen of the adapter maintenance screen.
EtherNet/IP scanner maintenance screen (Detail)
EtherNet/IP adapter maintenance screen (Scanner detail)
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
49/87
Direction Scanner maintenance screen T => O
Mean of RPI and API RPI : Specified value of the data-sending interval for adapter. API : Interval when scanner received the data from adapter.
Judgment of value The processing of adapter (destination equipment) is: RPI=API : In time RPI<API : Not in time The processing of scanner (CNC) is: RPI=API : In time RPI<API : Not in time
O => T
RPI : Specified value of the data-sending interval for scanner. API : Interval when scanner sent data to adapter.
Adapter maintenance screen
O => T
RPI : Specified value of the data-sending interval for scanner. API : Interval when adapter received the data from scanner.
The processing of scanner (destination equipment) is: RPI=API : In time RPI<API : Not in time The processing of adapter (CNC) is: RPI=API : In time RPI<API : Not in time
T => O
RPI : Specified value of the data-sending interval for adapter. API : Interval when adapter sent data to scanner.
Confirm that API and RPI of O => T is almost the same value when CNC is used as scanner. Confirm API and RPI of T => O is almost the same value when CNC is used as adapter. There is a possibility that the processing of CNC is not in time when the value of API is greatly different from RPI or the value of API changes periodically and it doesn't stabilize. Change RPI to a bigger value to give a margin There is another method to confirm the communication load; at first set a value that is smaller than the necessary value to RPI, then confirm that API is not greatly different from RPI. By this method, it can be confirmed whether there is still margin in processing when RPI is set to the necessary value. The minimum value of RPI is 4ms. A value that is smaller than this cannot be set.
NOTE In CNC, EtherNet/IP functions are executed with high priority than other Ethernet function like FOCAS2/Ethernet function or CNC screen display function. Therefore, when EtherNet/IP functions are used together with other Ethernet functions, it is necessary to give a margin enough for processing of EtherNet/IP functions. Otherwise, time to process other Ethernet functions cannot be assigned, and there is a possibility that these functions cannot be executed correctly.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
50/87
G.4.2
RPI AND DATA SIZE
In EtherNet/IP, the cycle of the data transmission is specified by RPI of each connection. The data length per second is calculated by the RPI and data size of each connection. This data length per second can be used as a guidance of a setup. The adapter function and the scanner function are running on the same resources (hardware or software). If the adapter function and the scanner function are used at the same time, total of data length per second is sum of these values. Total of data length per second (byte) = Scanner function total of data length per second + Adapter function total of data length per second The data length per second of scanner function is displayed to a screen. See "DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC (TOTAL)" in the list of scanner setting screen.
EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (List)
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
51/87
The data length per second of adapter function can be calculated by RPI value specified by scanner. The adapter function supports maximum four allocation settings. The total of data length per second is obtained by totaling these values.
Total of data length of the adapter function per second (byte) = ( Size of Allocation setting No.1 (DI + DO)) (byte) *
1000 )+
RPI of Allocation setting No.1 (ms) 1000 ( Size of Allocation setting No.2 (DI + DO)) (byte) * RPI of Allocation setting No.2 (ms) 1000 ( Size of Allocation setting No.3 (DI + DO)) (byte) * RPI of Allocation setting No.3 (ms) 1000 ( Size of Allocation setting No.4 (DI + DO)) (byte) * RPI of Allocation setting No.4 (ms) ) )+ )+
NOTE Both DI size and DO size are added to the data length per second.
The maximum value of the total of data length per second that EtherNet/IP functions of CNC can operate is about 128,000 bytes. Please adjust the setting of RPI and the data size within this range. In addition, if CNC communicates with two or more equipments, set the larger value than the value of "Number of connected equipment * 2 [ms]" to the RPI. If the number of connected equipment is five, set the larger value than 10ms to RPI. The minimum value of RPI is 4ms.
NOTE The above-mentioned maximum value of the total of data length per second is guidance. This is not guarantee of the performance. When EtherNet/IP functions are used together with other Ethernet functions like "FOCAS2/Ethernet function" or "CNC screen display function", it is necessary to give a margin enough.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
52/87
The example of calculating total of data length per second of the adapter is shown as follows. Example 1) CNC communicates with a PLC by using Allocation setting No.1 with DI=200 bytes, DO=200 bytes, and RPI=4ms.
Adapter CNC DO=200 bytes, RPI=4ms Allocation setting No.1 DI=200bytes, RPI=4ms PLC Scanner
Total of data length per second = (200 + 200) * 1000 / 4 = 100,000 (bytes) Example 2) CNC communicates with three PLCs by using Allocation setting No.1 to 3. - PLC 1 : DI = 64 bytes, - PLC 2 : DI = 128 bytes, - PLC 3 : DI = 256 bytes,
Adapter CNC DO=64 bytes, RPI=8ms Allocation setting No.1 DI=64 bytes, RPI=8ms DO=128 bytes, RPI=20ms Allocation setting No.2 DI=128 bytes, RPI=20ms DO=256 bytes, RPI=20ms Allocation setting No.3 DI=256 bytes, RPI=20ms PLC 3 PLC 2 PLC 1 Scanner
DO = 64 bytes, DO = 128 bytes, DO = 256 bytes,
RPI = 8 ms RPI = 20 ms RPI = 20 ms
Total of data length per second = ((64 + 64) * 1000 / 8) + ((128 + 128) * 1000 / 20) + ((256 + 256) * 1000 / 20)) = 54,400 (bytes)
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
53/87
G.4.3
and scanner.
INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME
This section explains the input/output response time seen from the scanner when CNC is used for both adapter The input/output response time seen from the scanner is the total time of the following sequence; output signal is set by the ladder program in the scanner, the signal value is notified to the adapter, processed by the ladder program in the adapter, and input signal is processed by the ladder program in the scanner again. In this case, input/output response time seen from the scanner is estimated by the following expression. Input/output response time seen from the scanner = Tin1 + Tin2 + Tin3 + Tin-out + Tout1 + Tout2 + Tout3
CNC (Scanner) PMC Data area Ladder Program
Tin1
Tout3
EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Tout2
CNC (Adapter) PMC Data area
Tin2
Tout1
EtherNet/IP Adapter function
Tin-out
Ladder Program
Tin3
Scanner output data reading time (Tin1)

It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal until EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives the value of the signal in the scanner. When RPI of O => T is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is fixed value of 32ms.
Scanner output processing time (Tin2)

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Adapter function receives the value from the network. The EtherNet/IP Scanner function transmits the signal to the
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
54/87
network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the scanner to the adapter, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).
Adapter input data writing time (Tin3)

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function received the value of signal from the network until adapter function writes the value to PMC data area. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area immediately. Therefore, it can be estimated to be almost zero.
Adapter ladder program processing time (Tin-out)

The ladder program operates in a cycle that is a multiple of 4 ms or 8 ms depending on the size of the ladder program. The actual time can be measured with SCAN TIME on the PMC STAUS screen.
Adapter output data reading time (Tout1)

It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal to the PMC data area until EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads it in CNC. When RPI is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is fixed value of 32ms.
Adapter output processing time (Tout2)

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives it. The EtherNet/IP Adapter function transmits the signal to the network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the adapter to the scanner, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).
Scanner input data writing time (Tout3)

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives the data from the network until it sends the data to the ladder program. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area immediately. Therefore, it can be estimated to be almost zero.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
55/87
NOTE 1 In CNC, the time from when the ladder program sets the value to the signal until the data is sent to the network is as follows. - Scanner function : Tin1+Tin2 - Adapter function : Tout1+Tout2 In both cases, the maxima is as follows. - When RPI is smaller than 32 ms, RPI * 2 (ms) - When RPI is 32 ms or more, RPI + 32 (ms) 2 When the connection of the Class1 communication has not established it, the value of Tout1 is a fixed value of 32ms. Therefore, when the value is read by the Explicit message when Class1 is not communicated, the value is updated in each 32ms. When the value is written by the Explicit message, data is immediately reflected in the PMC data area.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
56/87
G.5
NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM
The following provides notes on creating a ladder program required to construct a safety system in a system that uses EtherNet/IP functions.
CAUTION The time after the power is turned on until communication is actually started may vary depending on the connected device status and other factors. If it is necessary to strictly determine whether communication starts, use not the time or status, but actual communication data. Input and output signals
An output signal from the CNC is written by the ladder program into the PMC data area. The reading/writing process of EtherNet/IP functions reads the signal and sent it to the Ethernet network. An input signal also flows a similar route in the opposite direction. Though the following figures describe the adapter function, it is similar to the scanner function.
CNC
PMC Reading/writing Process Ladder program Process PMC data area EtherNet/IP Adapter DeviceNet function Scanner
Input signal Output signal
Ethernet
Ladder program process and reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions

Processing by the ladder program and the reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions operate asynchronously with one another. Processing by the ladder program can operate independently of reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions, so the ladder program can be repeatedly executed at high-speed.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
57/87
The following figure shows a time chart of the internal operation of the CNC with signals output from the ladder program.
mth (m+1)th (m+2)th
Ladder program process
Content of data area A: Content of data area B:
Reading/writing process of EtherNet/IP :

nth

(n+1)th

(n+2)th

(n+3)th
Transferred to scanner
Time chart
The upper part of the figure indicates that processing by the ladder program is performed periodically and writing to data area A or data area B in the PMC is performed in the ladder program. The middle part indicates that how data area A and data area B are updated in this case. There are differences in the timing in which data is written to data area A or data area B even in the same execution cycle of the ladder program, so data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time. The lower part indicates that reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions is cyclically made to read data in data area A and data area B. Since data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time, for example, in the case of (n+1) Th refreshing, the data written by one execution of the ladder program cannot be read as one set. Conversely, when input signals from a scanner are processed in the ladder program, the data written by one execution of writing may not be read by one execution of the ladder program.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
58/87
CAUTION Reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions is made asynchronously with the execution of the ladder program. Therefore, keep the following in mind when creating a ladder program. 1. When an input signal from EtherNet/IP set in the specified PMC address is read from two points in the ladder program, even if the ladder program can be executed in one cycle, there is no guarantee that the same value can be read. 2. When the ladder program writes an output signal to EtherNet/IP in the specified PMC address, the signal may be transferred to a scanner device before the ladder program is completely executed. Concurrency of data
When DI data or DO data is handled with the ladder program, the concurrency of long data (4-byte data) and word data (2-byte data) is guaranteed (there is no data spikes) under the corresponding constraints.
CAUTION If the following constraints are not satisfied, the concurrency of long data or word data is not guaranteed.
Concurrency of long data (4-byte data)

To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions. 1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of four bytes. Commands: MOVD, MOVN, XMOVB, SETND, XCHGD, DSCHB, TBLRD, TBLWD, DSEQD, DSNED, DSGTD, DSLTD, DSGED, DSLED, DMAXD, DMIND, EQD, NED, GTD, LTD, GED, LED, RNGD, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORD, ANDD, ORD, NOTD, SHLD, SHRD, ROLD, RORD, BSETD, BRSTD, BTSTD, BPOSD, BCNTD, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDD, FBCDD, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSD, SUBSD, MULSD, DIVSD, MODSD, INCSD, DECSD, ABSSD, NEGSD 2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 4-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/4, 1:R0004/8, 1:R0008/12, 1:E0000/16 3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "1", and Bit 1 as "0" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP functions, the data unit of four bytes is specified.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
59/87
Concurrency of word data (2-byte data)

To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions. 1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of two bytes. Commands: MOVW, MOVN, XMOVB, SETNW, XCHGW, DSCHB, TBLRW, TBLWW, DSEQW, DSNEW, DSGTW, DSLTW, DSGEW, DSLEW, DMAXW, DMINW, EQW, NEW, GTW, LTW, GEW, LEW, RNGW, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORW, ANDW, ORW, NOTW, SHLW, SHRW, ROLW, RORW, BSETW, BRSTW, BTSTW, BPOSW, BCNTW, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDW, FBCDW, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSW, SUBSW, MULSW, DIVSW, MODSW, INCSW, DECSW, ABSSW, NEGSW 2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at Allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 2-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/2, 2:R0002/4, 3:R0004/6, 1:E0002/8 3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "0", and Bit 1 as "1" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP functions, the data unit of two bytes is specified.
Concurrency of byte data (1-byte data)

There are no special constraints. The concurrency is always guaranteed in 1-byte data.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
60/87
G.6
EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION
This chapter describes the example of connecting the EtherNet/IP adapter and the EtherNet/IP scanner by Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power Motion i -A.
G.6.1
EXAMPLE (1)
This section describes the parameter settings to connect one EtherNet/IP scanner and two EtherNet/IP adapters.
Equipment #2
Setting 01 Setting 02 DI DO DI DO Scan Scan Scan Scan
Equipment #1
DO DI Adpt Adpt Allocation 01 DO DI Adpt Adpt Allocation 01
Equipment #3
Example of connection EtherNet/IP (1)
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design 2011.08.10
61/87
G.6.1.1
The image of data exchange
In the above-mentioned three equipments, the equipment #1 and #3 are running as EtherNet/IP scanner, and equipment #2 is running as EtherNet/IP adapter. Therefore, equipment #2 can read DO data of other two equipments.
Setting #1 Setting #2 Setting #3
Adapter 192.168.0.101
1:R0000 1:R0003 1:R0004 1:R0008
Scanner 192.168.0.102
1:R0000 1:R0003
Adapter 192.168.0.103 Adpt: Status
Adpt: Status
Scan: Status
1:R0100 1:R0164 1:R0228
Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 Adpt: DI Alloc. 01
1:R0100 1:R0164 1:R0228 1:R0292 1:R0356
Scan: DI Setting 01 Scan: DO Setting 01 Scan: DI Setting 02 Scan: DO Setting 02

1:R0228 1:R0292
Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 Adpt: DI Alloc. 01
G.6.1.2
Parameter setting example

Parameters for the equipment #1 Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL STATUS ADDRESS STATUS SIZE OPTION 1 OPTION 2 ALLOCATION 01 DI TYPE DI ADDRESS DI SIZE DO TYPE DO ADDRESS DO SIZE
HOLD 1:R0000 3 00000000 00000000 ENABLE 01 1:R0164 64 01 1:R0100 64 FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
Description Design S.Matsukura Apprv.
62/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
OPTION
00000000
Parameters for the equipment #3 Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL STATUS ADDRESS STATUS SIZE OPTION 1 OPTION 2 ALLOCATION 01 DI TYPE DI ADDRESS DI SIZE DO TYPE DO ADDRESS DO SIZE OPTION
HOLD 1:R0000 3 00000000 00000000 ENABLE 01 1:R0292 64 01 1:R0228 64 00000000
Parameters in the masked area are initial value.

Parameters for the equipment #2 Items of Scanner Parameters Items of Scanner Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL STATUS ADDRESS STATUS SIZE OPTION 1 OPTION 2
HOLD 1:R0004 4 00000000 00000000
SETTING 01 IP ADDRESS T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE T => O SIZE T => O RPI O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE O => T SIZE O => T RPI CONFIGURATION
ENABLE 192.168.0.101 101 64 4 151 64 4 100
SETTING 02 IP ADDRESS T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE T => O SIZE T => O RPI O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE O => T SIZE O => T RPI CONFIGURATION
ENABLE 192.168.0.103 101 64 4 151 64 4 100
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
63/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
DATA UNIT ENDIAN DI (T => O) TYPE DI (T => O) ADDRESS DO (O => T) TYPE DO (O => T) ADDRESS T => O TRANSPORT TYPE T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT CODE ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION ELECTRONIC KEY COMPATIBILITY TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER RECONNECT PRODUCTION TRIGGER OPTION1 OPTION2
1 BYTE DISABLE 01 1:R0100 01 1:R0164 UNICAST MODELESS SCHEDULED UNICAST RUN/IDLE SCHEDULED 0000H 0000H
DATA UNIT ENDIAN DI (T => O) TYPE DI (T => O) ADDRESS DO (O => T) TYPE DO (O => T) ADDRESS T => O TRANSPORT TYPE T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE
1 BYTE DISABLE 01 1:R0228 01 1:R0292 UNICAST MODELESS SCHEDULED UNICAST RUN/IDLE SCHEDULED 0000H 0000H
0000H
ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT CODE
0000H
0.000 DISABLE
ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION ELECTRONIC KEY COMPATIBILITY
0.000 DISABLE
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000
TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER RECONNECT PRODUCTION TRIGGER OPTION1 OPTION2
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
64/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
G.6.2
EXAMPLE (2)
This section describes the parameter settings to connect two EtherNet/IP scanners and one EtherNet/IP adapter.
Equipment #2
Allocation Allocation 01 02 DI DO DI DO Adpt Adpt Adpt Adpt
Equipment #1
DO DI Scan Scan Setting 01 DO DI Scan Scan Setting 01
Equipment #3
G.6.2.1
In the above-mentioned three equipments, the equipment #1 and #3 are running as EtherNet/IP scanner, and #2 is running as EtherNet/IP adapter. Therefore, equipment #2 can read DO data of other two equipments.
Scanner 192.168.0.101
1:R0000 1:R0003 1:R0004 1:R0008
Adapter 192.168.0.102 Adpt: Status
Scanner 192.168.0.103
Scan: Status
1:R0004 1:R0008
Scan: Status
1:R0100 1:R0164 1:R0228
Scan: DO Setting 01 Scan: DI Setting 01
1:R0100 1:R0164 1:R0228 1:R0292 1:R0356
Adpt: DI Alloc. 01 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 Adpt: DI Alloc. 02 Adpt: DO Alloc. 02

1:R0228 1:R0292
Scan: DO Setting 01 Scan: DI Setting 01
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
65/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
G.6.2.2

Parameters for the equipment #3 Parameters Items of Scanner Parameters
Parameters for the equipment #1 Items of Scanner
HOLD 1:R0004 4 00000000 00000000
HOLD 1:R0004 4 00000000 00000000
SETTING 01 IP ADDRESS T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE T => O SIZE T => O RPI O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE O => T SIZE O => T RPI CONFIGURATION DATA UNIT ENDIAN DI (T => O) TYPE DI (T => O) ADDRESS DO (O => T) TYPE DO (O => T) ADDRESS T => O TRANSPORT TYPE T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT CODE
ENABLE 192.168.0.102 101 64 4 151 64 4 100 1 BYTE DISABLE 01 1:R0164 01 1:R0100 UNICAST MODELESS SCHEDULED UNICAST RUN/IDLE SCHEDULED 0000H 0000H
SETTING 01 IP ADDRESS T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE T => O SIZE T => O RPI O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE O => T SIZE O => T RPI CONFIGURATION DATA UNIT ENDIAN DI (T => O) TYPE DI (T => O) ADDRESS DO (O => T) TYPE DO (O => T) ADDRESS T => O TRANSPORT TYPE T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE
ENABLE 192.168.0.102 102 64 4 152 64 4 100 1 BYTE DISABLE 01 1:R0292 01 1:R0228 UNICAST MODELESS SCHEDULED UNICAST RUN/IDLE SCHEDULED 0000H 0000H
0000H
0000H
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
66/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION ELECTRONIC KEY COMPATIBILITY TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER RECONNECT PRODUCTION TRIGGER OPTION1 OPTION2
0.000 DISABLE
0.000 DISABLE
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000

Parameters for the equipment #2 Items of Adapter Parameters Items of Adapter Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL STATUS ADDRESS STATUS SIZE OPTION 1 OPTION 2 ALLOCATION 01 DI TYPE DI ADDRESS DI SIZE DO TYPE DO ADDRESS DO SIZE OPTION
HOLD 1:R0000 3 00000000 00000000 ENABLE 01 1:R0100 64 01 1:R0164 64 00000000 ALLOCATION 02 DI TYPE DI ADDRESS DI SIZE DO TYPE DO ADDRESS DO SIZE OPTION ENABLE 01 1:R0228 64 01 1:R0292 64 00000000
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
67/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
G.6.3
EXAMPLE (3)
This section describes the parameter settings to send own DO data to the other equipments.
Equipment #2
Setting Alloc. Setting 01 01 02 DI DO DI Scan Adpt Scan
Equipment #1
Setting DI 01 Scan DO Adpt Alloc. 01 DO DI Setting Scan 01 Adpt Alloc. 01 DI Setting Scan 02
Equipment #3
Setting DI 02 Scan
G.6.3.1
In the above-mentioned three equipments, all equipments are running as both EtherNet/IP scanner and EtherNet/IP adapter, and DO data are transmitted by the multicast. Therefore, all equipments can read DO data of other equipments.
Scanner + Adapter 192.168.0.101

1:R0000 1:R0003 1:R0004 1:R0008

1:R0000 1:R0003

1:R0000 1:R0003
Adpt: Status
Adpt: Status
Adpt: Status
Scan: Status
1:R0004 1:R0008
Scan: Status
1:R0004 1:R0008
Scan: Status
1:R0100 1:R0164 1:R0228 1:R0292
Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 Scan: DI Setting 01 Scan: DI Setting 02
1:R0100 1:R0164 1:R0228 1:R0292
Scan: DI Setting 01 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 Scan: DI Setting 02
1:R0100 1:R0164 1:R0228 1:R0292
Scan: DI Setting 01 Scan: DI Setting 02 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
68/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
G.6.3.2

HOLD 1:R0000 3 00000000 00000000
ALLOCATION 01 DI TYPE DI ADDRESS DI SIZE DO TYPE DO ADDRESS DO SIZE DI TYPE
ENABLE 00 --0 01 1:R0100 64 00000000
Items of Scanner
Parameters
Items of Scanner
Parameters
HOLD 1:R0004 4 00000000 00000000
SETTING 01 IP ADDRESS T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE T => O SIZE T => O RPI O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE O => T SIZE O => T RPI CONFIGURATION DATA UNIT ENDIAN DI (T => O) TYPE DI (T => O) ADDRESS DO (O => T) TYPE DO (O => T) ADDRESS T => O TRANSPORT TYPE
ENABLE 192.168.0.102 101 64 4 254 0 4 100 1 BYTE DISABLE 01 1:R0164 00 --MULTICAST
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
69/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT CODE ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION ELECTRONIC KEY COMPATIBILITY TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER RECONNECT PRODUCTION TRIGGER OPTION1 OPTION2
MODELESS SCHEDULED UNICAST HEARTBEAT SCHEDULED 0000H 0000H
T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE
0000H
0000H
0.000 DISABLE
0.000 DISABLE
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000

HOLD 1:R0000 3 00000000 00000000
ALLOCATION 01 DI TYPE DI ADDRESS DI SIZE DO TYPE DO ADDRESS DO SIZE OPTION
ENABLE 00 --0 01 1:R0164 64 00000000
Items of Scanner
Parameters
Items of Scanner
Parameters
DI DATA ON ABNORMAL STATUS ADDRESS STATUS SIZE OPTION 1
HOLD 1:R0004 4 00000000 FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
70/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
OPTION 2
00000000
SETTING 01 IP ADDRESS T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE T => O SIZE T => O RPI O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE O => T SIZE O => T RPI CONFIGURATION DATA UNIT ENDIAN DI (T => O) TYPE DI (T => O) ADDRESS DO (O => T) TYPE DO (O => T) ADDRESS T => O TRANSPORT TYPE T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT CODE ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION ELECTRONIC KEY COMPATIBILITY TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER RECONNECT PRODUCTION TRIGGER OPTION1 OPTION2
ENABLE 192.168.0.101 101 64 4 254 0 4 100 1 BYTE DISABLE 01 1:R0100 00 --MULTICAST MODELESS SCHEDULED UNICAST HEARTBEAT SCHEDULED 0000H 0000H
SETTING 02 IP ADDRESS T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE T => O SIZE T => O RPI O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE O => T SIZE O => T RPI CONFIGURATION DATA UNIT ENDIAN DI (T => O) TYPE DI (T => O) ADDRESS DO (O => T) TYPE DO (O => T) ADDRESS T => O TRANSPORT TYPE T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE
ENABLE 192.168.0.103 101 64 4 254 0 4 100 1 BYTE DISABLE 01 1:R0228 00 --MULTICAST MODELESS SCHEDULED UNICAST HEARTBEAT SCHEDULED 0000H 0000H
0000H
0000H
0.000 DISABLE
0.000 DISABLE
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
71/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai

HOLD 1:R0000 3 00000000 00000000
ALLOCATION 01 DI TYPE DI ADDRESS DI SIZE DO TYPE DO ADDRESS DO SIZE OPTION
ENABLE 00 --0 01 1:R0228 64 00000000
Items of Scanner
Parameters
Items of Scanner
Parameters
HOLD 1:R0004 4 00000000 00000000
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
72/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT CODE ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION ELECTRONIC KEY COMPATIBILITY TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER RECONNECT PRODUCTION TRIGGER OPTION1 OPTION2
T => O HEADER FORMAT T => O PRIORITY O => T TRANSPORT TYPE O => T HEADER FORMAT O => T PRIORITY ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE
0000H
0000H
0.000 DISABLE
0.000 DISABLE
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000
X4 0 CYCLIC 00000000 00000000
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
73/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
G.7
G.7.1
ATTACHED MATERIAL
SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE
Supported class and instance are as follows. The line where item "A" is checked is a class supported by the adapter function, and where item "S" is checked is a class supported by the scanner function.
Name A S Class code Instance number
Identity Message Router Assembly Connection Manager Connection Configuration Port TCP/IP Ethernet Link
01h 02h 04h 06h F3h F4h F5h F6h
01h 01h 64h, 65h, 66h, 67h, 68h, 97h, 98h, 99h, 9Ah, FEh, FFh 01h 01h 01h 01h 01h
The relation between the number of allocation setting and instance number of Assembly object in the adapter function is as follows.
Number of allocation setting Output Assembly (T->O) Exclusive Owner, Input Only, Listen Only Input Assembly (O->T) Exclusive Owner Input Only Listen Only
1 2 3 4
65h (101) Size : 1 to 256 byte 66h (102) Size : 1 to 256 byte 67h (103) Size : 1 to 256 byte 68h (104) Size : 1 to 256 byte
97h (151) Size : 1 to 256 byte 98h (152) Size : 1 to 256 byte 99h (153) Size : 1 to 256 byte 9Ah (154) Size : 1 to 256 byte FEh (254) Size : 0 byte FFh (255) Size : 0 byte
Number of allocation setting Configuration Assembly
1 2 3 4 64h (100) Size : 0 byte
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
74/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
G.7.2
ERR GEN (Hex)
ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP
The meaning of error code of EtherNet/IP displayed on the maintenance screen or the log screen is as follows.
ERR EXT Detected By (Hex) Description
01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01
0100 0103 0106 0107 0108 0109 0110 0111 0113
Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Scanner
Connection is in use Transport class1 or specified trigger is not supported The Exclusive Owner connection has already existed Connection is requested to be closed, but it has already closed Specified transport type is not supported Specified DI or DO size is not accepted for to the adapter Specified assembly instance is not configured Specified RPI is not supported Cannot create new connection any more
Adapter Specified vender ID or the product code is different from the value in 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 0114 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 011A 011B Adapter the electronic key Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Only connection types currently open. Adapter Adapter Time Scanner 01 01 01 01 01 0203 Adapter 0204 0205 0206 0207 Scanner Adapter Scanner Scanner response message was not received. Scanner 01 0301 Adapter There is not enough buffer memory Unconnected request such as a connection request has timed out Parameter for unconnected request is error Message for unconnected transmission is too large Acknowledge for unconnected message was received but a data Connection has timed out Cannot create new connection any more The Adapter to Scanner RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Specified device type is different from the value in the electronic key Specified revision is different from the value in the electronic key Specified DI or DO assembly instance is not supported Specified configuration application path is not supported Connection request for Listen Only fails since there is no non-Listen
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
75/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
Scanner 01 0302 Adapter Scanner 01 0303 Adapter Scanner 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 0304 Adapter 0311 0312 0315 Adapter 0316 0317 Adapter 0318 0319 031A 031B 031C Adapter 031D 031E Adapter Adapter receiving side link reception resource anymore In the sending side device, there is no user configurable receiving 01 01 01 01 01 01 031F 0800 0810 0811 0812 0813 Adapter side link reception resource Scanner Adapter Scanner Scanner Adapter Network link is offline There is no target application data can be used. There is no originator application data can be used. Node address has changed since the network was scheduled It is not configured for off-subnet multicast Redundant connection mismatch In the sending side device, there is no available user configurable Scanner Adapter Adapter Adapter Scanner Miscellaneous error Link address to self is invalid Secondary resource cannot be used Rack connection has already been established Module connection has already been established Adapter Scanner Schedule is not specified invalid Specified connection path in the connection close request is invalid Scanner Scanner Scanner Specified port is not available Specified link address is invalid Specified segment type or segment value in the connection path is It is not configured to send the schedule priority data. There is no reception connection ID filter can be used There is not enough network bandwidth for data
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
76/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
G.7.3
SCANNER SETUP BY EDS FILE
This chapter describes the contents of the EDS file of the adapter, and the method of setting them to a setup screen of the scanner.
G.7.3.1
Structure of the EDS file
The EDS file is classified in the section. It is possible to set two or more fields in the one section. The parameter is set to each field. ";" (semicolon) is placed at the end of the parameter. It is possible to set two or more parameters in the one field. In that case, the separator "," is placed between parameter and parameter. It is a comment from character "$" to the end of line.
$Comment [Section name 1] Field name 1= Parameter; Field name 2= Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3; --[Section name 2] ---
G.7.3.2
Section [Device]
The equipment information of the adapter is described in the section [Device]. Input this value to "ELECTRONIC KEY" of the detail screen. However, if the confirmation of the adapter equipment is unnecessary, there is no need to change the value of "ELECTRONIC KEY" from the initial value.
Setting item of the detail screen Field name in the EDS file
VENDOR ID DEVICE TYPE PRODUCT CODE REVISION
VendCode ProdType ProdCode MajRev MinRev
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
77/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
Example)
[Device] VendCode = 591; ProdType = 12; ProdCode = 101; MajRev = 1; MinRev = 3;
The setting value of the "ELECTRONIC KEY" is as follows in case of the above-mentioned EDS file.
Setting item of the detail screen Parameter
VENDOR ID DEVICE TYPE PRODUCT CODE REVISION
591(Dec) / 24F (Hex) 12(Dec) /C (Hex) 101(Dec) /65 (Hex) 1.3
G.7.3.3
Section [Connection Manager]
The specification of the connection that can be created by Adapter equipment is described in the section [Connection Manager]. If more than one field is specified, select the suitable field by referring the 13th parameter, "Connection name". 15 parameters specified in the field and the correspondences of input item of the scanner setting screen are as follows.
Setting item in the setting screen Parameter in the EDS file Description Remarks
(None)
1st parameter Bit 0-6
Bit 0 : Class 0 Bit 1 : Class 1 Bit 2 : Class 2 Bit 3 : Class 3 Bit 4 : Class 4 Bit 5 : Class 5 Bit 6 : Class 6
This is the communication class. The scanner function supports only class 1.
PRODUCTION TRIGGER
1st parameter Bit 16-18
Bit 16 : CYCLIC Bit 17 : CHANGE STATE Bit 18 : APPLICATION
(None)
1st parameter
Bit 24 : Listen Only
This is the communication type FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A EtherNet/IP Scanner function
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
78/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
Bit 24-27
Bit 25 : Input Only Bit 26 : Exclusive Owner Bit 27 : Redundant Owner
The scanner function doesn't support Redundant Owner.
(None)
2nd parameter Bit 0-3
Bit 0 : O=>T fixed size Bit 1 : O=>T variable size Bit 2 : T=>O fixed size Bit 3 : T=>O variable size
This is the assembly data size, fixed size or variable size. The scanner function supports only fixed size.
O => T HEADER FORMAT
0 : MODELESS 3 : HEARTBEAT 4 : RUN/IDLE
T => O HEADER FORMAT
0 : MODELESS 3 : HEARTBEAT 4 : RUN/IDLE
O => T TRANSPORT TYPE
Bit 16 : NULL Bit 17 : MULTICAST Bit 18 : UNICAST
The scanner function supports only UNICAST.
T => O TRANSPORT TYPE
Bit 20 : NULL Bit 21 : MULTICAST Bit 22 : UNICAST
All of Transport type bit acceptable by the Adapter can be specified in the EDS file. Specify the one Transport type from them in the setting screen.
O => T PRIORITY
Bit 24 : LOW Bit 25 : HIGH Bit 26 : SCHEDULED Bit 27 : URGENT
The scanner function supports only SCHEDULED.
T => O PRIORITY
Bit 28 : LOW Bit 29 : HIGH Bit 30 : SCHEDULED Bit 31 : URGENT
O => T RPI
3rd parameter
Numerical value (Unit:second) ParamN
If this parameter is PramN or is empty, specify the RPI value.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
79/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
O => T SIZE
4th parameter
Numerical value (Unit:byte) ParamN
If this parameter is "PramN" or is empty, it means that the setting of input size of the adapter equipment is necessary. At first, specify this parameter to the adapter equipment, and then specify the same value to the scanner equipment.
(None) T => O RPI
5th parameter 6th parameter Numerical value(Unit:second) ParamN
This is the format of O => T. If this parameter is PramN or is empty, specify the RPI value.
T => O SIZE
7th parameter
Numerical value(Unit:second) ParamN
If this parameter is "PramN" or is empty, it means that the setting of output size of the adapter equipment is necessary. At first, specify this parameter to the adapter equipment, and then specify the same value to the scanner equipment.
(None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None)
8th parameter 9th parameter 10th parameter 11th parameter 12th parameter 13th parameter 14th parameter Configuration #1 size Configuration #1 format Configuration #2 size Configuration #2 format Connection name Help string
This is the format of T => O. These parameters cannot be specified from setting screen If necessary, use the other companies setting tool. This is the connection name. This is the help string for the connection name.
O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE CONFIG ASSEMBLY INSTANCE
15th parameter
Numerical value (Hex)
This is the one byte value after the 1st "2C".
15th parameter
This is the one byte value after the 2nd "2C".
15th parameter
This is the one byte value after the "24".
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
80/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
Example)
[Connection Manager] Connection1 = 0x04010002, 0x44640405, Param1, Param2, , Param3, Param4, , ,, ,, "class1 - exclusive owner", "", "20 04 24 64 2C 97 2C 65";
The setting value of scanner setting screens to communicate with the above-mentioned EDS file is as follows.
Setting item Screen Parameter
Transport trigger O => T Header format T => O Header format O => T Transport type T => O Transport type
Detail setting 4/4 Detail setting 2/4 Detail setting 1/4 Detail setting 2/4 Detail setting 1/4
CYCLIC RUN/IDLE MODELESS UNICAST UNICAST (Select from UNICAST or MULTICAST)
O => T Priority T => O Priority O => T RPI O => T Size T => O RPI T => O Size O => T Assembly instance T => O Assembly instance Configuration Assembly instance
Detail setting 2/4 Detail setting 1/4 Simple setting 1/2 Simple setting 1/2 Simple setting 1/2 Simple setting 1/2 Simple setting 1/2 Simple setting 1/2 Simple setting 1/2
SCHEDULED (Fixed) SCHEDULED Specify the needed communication interval. Specify size suitable for the adapter equipment. Specify the needed communication interval. Specify size suitable for the adapter equipment. 151 (Decimal) 101 (Decimal) 100 (Decimal)
It is necessary to specify about CNC such as PMC address, etc. in the 2/2 page of the simple screen.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
81/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
G.7.4
G.7.4.1
SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL
Outline
The parameter of the scanner function can be set from the scanner setting screen of CNC, but it is possible to set them from the "RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP" (hereinafter referred to as "RSNetWorx") that is personal computer software released by Rockwell Automation company. When the adapter needs a detailed setting concerning the configuration, it is not possible to set it from the scanner setting screen. Use the RSNetWorx. A detailed setting concerning the configuration is necessary in the following condition. - In the "Configuration Manager" section for communication in EDS file of an adapter, 9th to 12th parameters have some value. If these parameters are empty, setup can be done by both scanner setting screen and RSNetWorx. RSNetWorx operation in this manual was confirmed with revision 10.00.00(CPR 9 SR2). The setting procedure by RSNetWorx is the following. 1. 2. 3. Create setting parameter on RSNetWorx. Transmit the parameter from RSNetWorx to CNC. Setup PMC address in CNC.
NOTE 1. When both adapter CNC and scanner CNC are connected in the same network, setting by RSNetWorx is not possible. Refer to the "G.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION", and setup by CNC scanner setting screen. 2. If a setup is transmitted to CNC from RSNetWorx, a communication setup of CNC will be overwritten sequentially from No. 1.
G.7.4.2
Operation
In this section, the setting procedure of scanner by RSNetWorx is described. Refer to the Rockwell Automation manual about details of operation procedure of the Rockwell Automation's software.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
82/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
Create setting parameter on RSNetWorx

1. Operate the RSLinx that is software for the personal computer released by Rockwell Automation company, and set IP address of CNC to the AB_ETH driver. As a result, RSNetWorx can communicate with CNC. Select "Communications", "Configure Drivers", from RSLinks menu. And select "Ethernet devices" from "Driver Types", and then add the IP address of CNC.
RSLinx Driver setting screen
2. 3.
Run RSNetWorx. Register EDS files for adapter equipment and for the CNC Scanner function. Select "Tools", "EDS Wizard" from the menu of RSNetWork and register the EDS file according to the instruction of the screen. When an EDS file was registered, equipment is added to the tree on the left side of the screen.
NOTE To register an EDS file for CNC, use the EDS file of the Scanner function. The EDS file which include both Adapter function and Scanner function cannot be used. Refer to the "G.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE" for details of EDS file output.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
83/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
4.
Double-click CNC (Series 30i) from the tree at the left of RSNetWorx. When IP address is input and the OK button is pushed, the icon (gray cube) is displayed at the right of the screen. Display the icon of the adapter equipment that should be connected by the same procedure.
RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP
5.
Right-click the icon of CNC (Series 30i), and select "Scanlist Configuration" from the pop-up menu. The Scanlist Configuration screen is displayed. The line with green background color is a scanner, and the line with white background color is an adapter.
Scanlist Configuration screen
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
84/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
6.
Double-click the line of the adapter that communicates with CNC of the scanner. The Connection Properties screen is displayed. Set the value if necessary. Push the OK button when the setting ends.
Select connection name
Specify RPI
Specify T => O size Specify O => T size
Do not use
7.
Preserve the setting on the Scanlist Configuration screen, and end the screen.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
85/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
Transmit the parameter from RSNetWorx to CNC

8. 9. Change the "NETWORK" from ONLINE to OFFLINE on the basic screen of the Scanner setting of CNC. Right click the icon of CNC on the screen of RSNetWorx, and select "Download To Device". Push the yes button to the confirmation dialog box. 10. The setting that set by RSNetWorx is displayed as "C" in the list screen of the Scanner setting of CNC. And the "STATE" is displayed as "CHANGING". These mean that setting is not available, because a necessary item such as the PMC address etc. has not been set yet though some value had set by a setting tool.
Setup PMC address in CNC.

11. Move the cursor to the setting of the communication of "C" on the list screen. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [SIMPLE] to display the simple screen.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
86/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai
12. Set an address of PMC area to the 2nd page of the simple screen.
13. Return to the list screen, and change the "STATE" of the communication setting to ENABLE. The "O" is displayed in the list screen of the Scanner setting of CNC. 14. Turn the CNC power off and on again.
NOTE When a detailed setting concerning the configuration set by RSNetWorx exists, if the "STATE" of such setting is changed to ENABLE, it is displayed in the list screen as "T". A detailed setting concerning the configuration is preserved in such setting. A detailed setting concerning the configuration cannot be displayed to CNC screen, and cannot be changed from CNC screen. To delete such a communication setting, execute the initializing procedure. Even if the value of items displayed on CNC screen is changed, a detailed setting concerning the configuration remain. Refer to the "G.2.6 Initialize" about details of the procedure of initialization.
Title
Draw No.
B-64014EN/04-3
Sheet
Edit
Date Date
Design
87/87
2011.08.10
N.Mutai

B-64014en 04

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

B-64014en 04

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC

Series Series Series Series

30+-MODEL A/B 31+-MODEL A/B 32+-MODEL A/B 35+-MODEL B

Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

I. GENERAL 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 3

II. SPECIFICATION 1 PREFACE................................................................................................ 7

ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ......................................... 9

DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ............................................................... 13

3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

III. SETTING 1 2 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION ................................... 33

SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS....................................... 36

SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS .................................. 48

SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION................................................ 52

SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .......... 60

EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS................................................................................................ 69

SETTING THE UNSOLICITED

SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION .......................... 70

EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION..................... 78

SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION............................... 86

ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING 91

IV. OPERATION 1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS................................. 95

1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .. 119

Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis...........................................................................122

OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION....................... 123

NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 129 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 129

V. CONNECTION 1 SETTING ............................................................................................. 133

Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ............................................................................. 137

CABLE CONNECTION ....................................................................... 142

ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES.......................................... 148

CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................................................... 152

VI. MAINTENANCE 1 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.................................. 157

Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ............................................................................. 160

SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION................................... 164

APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 181

EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP ................................................. 185

EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP ........................................... 254

FTP CLIENT OPERATION.................................................................. 266

SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack 2) / Vista ........ 283

This part explains the organization of this manual.

Fast Data Server (or simply referred to as "Data Server")

DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED Ethernet AND OPTIONAL BOARD

2.ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following hardware is prepared for Fast Ethernet.

2. ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE OPTIONS

2.ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

Do you use Data Server function?

Do you use Ethernet function? yes

Do you use FL-net function? yes

Do you use FL-net function? yes

One Ethe rnet case6

One Ethe rnet case8

Three Ethernets case1

One Ethe rnet case5

Two Ethernets case2

LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

2. ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B